Annotation of gcc/cse.c, revision 1.1.1.1

1.1       root        1: /* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
                      2:    Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
                      3: 
                      4: This file is part of GNU CC.
                      5: 
                      6: GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
                      7: it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
                      8: the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
                      9: any later version.
                     10: 
                     11: GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
                     12: but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
                     13: MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
                     14: GNU General Public License for more details.
                     15: 
                     16: You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
                     17: along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
                     18: the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.  */
                     19: 
                     20: 
                     21: #include "config.h"
                     22: #include "rtl.h"
                     23: #include "regs.h"
                     24: #include "hard-reg-set.h"
                     25: #include "flags.h"
                     26: #include "real.h"
                     27: #include "insn-config.h"
                     28: #include "recog.h"
                     29: 
                     30: #include <stdio.h>
                     31: #include <setjmp.h>
                     32: 
                     33: /* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
                     34:    through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
                     35:    have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
                     36:    expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
                     37: 
                     38:    It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
                     39:    when control paths merge; so, at each label, we forget all that is
                     40:    known and start fresh.  This can be described as processing each
                     41:    basic block separately.  Note, however, that these are not quite
                     42:    the same as the basic blocks found by a later pass and used for
                     43:    data flow analysis and register packing.  We do not need to start fresh
                     44:    after a conditional jump instruction if there is no label there.
                     45: 
                     46:    We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
                     47:    a hash table for most expressions, and several vectors together
                     48:    with "quantity numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
                     49: 
                     50:    The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
                     51:    because it is faster.  It is possible because registers references
                     52:    contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
                     53:    a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
                     54:    identical if they have the same number.  General expressions
                     55:    do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
                     56:    information recorded on an expression other than a register
                     57:    is to keep it in a hash table.
                     58: 
                     59: Registers and "quantity numbers":
                     60:    
                     61:    At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
                     62:    registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
                     63:    numbers to indicate their contents.  During scan, when the code
                     64:    copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
                     65:    When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
                     66:    quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
                     67:    `reg_qty' records what quantity a register is currently thought
                     68:    of as containing.
                     69: 
                     70:    All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to `max_reg'.
                     71:    If register N has not been assigned a quantity, reg_qty[N] will equal N.
                     72: 
                     73:    Quantity numbers below `max_reg' do not exist and none of the `qty_...'
                     74:    variables should be referenced with an index below `max_reg'.
                     75: 
                     76:    We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
                     77:    quantity number.  `qty_first_reg', `qty_last_reg',
                     78:    `reg_next_eqv' and `reg_prev_eqv' hold these chains.
                     79: 
                     80:    The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
                     81:    Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
                     82:    We replace any equivalent register with that one.
                     83: 
                     84:    If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
                     85:    REG expressions with `qty_mode' must be in the hash table for both
                     86:    registers and must be in the same class.
                     87: 
                     88:    The converse is not true.  Since hard registers may be referenced in
                     89:    any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
                     90:    but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
                     91:    of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
                     92:    
                     93: Constants and quantity numbers
                     94: 
                     95:    When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
                     96:    in the appropriate element of qty_const.  This is in addition to
                     97:    putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
                     98: 
                     99:    Whether a reg or a constant is prefered is determined by the configuration
                    100:    macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value.  In any
                    101:    event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
                    102: 
                    103:    When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
                    104:    of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate element
                    105:    of qty_const.
                    106: 
                    107:    Integer constants don't have a machine mode.  However, cse
                    108:    determines the intended machine mode from the destination
                    109:    of the instruction that moves the constant.  The machine mode
                    110:    is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
                    111:    constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
                    112: 
                    113: Other expressions:
                    114: 
                    115:    To record known equivalences among expressions in general
                    116:    we use a hash table called `table'.  It has a fixed number of buckets
                    117:    that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
                    118:    These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
                    119:    hash codes.
                    120: 
                    121:    Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
                    122:    currently have equivalent values.
                    123: 
                    124:    Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
                    125:    the expression.  This is done using `reg_qty' and `qty_first_reg'.
                    126:    The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
                    127:    number, not the register number.
                    128: 
                    129:    When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
                    130:    hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
                    131:    could be different as a result.
                    132: 
                    133:      1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
                    134:      ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed.  That is because
                    135:      nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
                    136:      The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
                    137: 
                    138:      The special cases are when the address is constant or is
                    139:      a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
                    140:      or a static chain pointer.  When such addresses are stored in,
                    141:      we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
                    142:      due to overlap.  `invalidate' does this.
                    143:      All expressions that refer to non-constant
                    144:      memory addresses are also invalidated.  `invalidate_memory' does this.
                    145: 
                    146:      2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
                    147:      containing references to that register, and only those,
                    148:      must be removed.
                    149: 
                    150:    Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
                    151:    a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
                    152:    Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
                    153:    entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
                    154:    changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
                    155:    the register's new value.  This sequence of circumstances is rare
                    156:    within any one basic block.
                    157: 
                    158:    The vectors `reg_tick' and `reg_in_table' are used to detect this case.
                    159:    reg_tick[i] is incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
                    160:    reg_in_table[i] holds -1 if no references to register i have been
                    161:    entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value reg_tick[i] had
                    162:    when the references were entered.  If we want to enter a reference
                    163:    and reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i], we must scan and remove old references.
                    164:    Until we want to enter a new entry, the mere fact that the two vectors
                    165:    don't match makes the entries be ignored if anyone tries to match them.
                    166: 
                    167:    Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
                    168:    the equivalent-register chains.  However, the vectors `reg_tick'
                    169:    and `reg_in_table' do not apply to expressions which are simple
                    170:    register references.  These expressions are removed from the table
                    171:    immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
                    172:    we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
                    173:    the register.
                    174: 
                    175:    A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
                    176:    reuse.  A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
                    177:    invalidates everything that resides in memory.
                    178: 
                    179: Related expressions:
                    180: 
                    181:    Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
                    182:    are called related.  When a constant expression is put in
                    183:    the table, the related expression with no constant term
                    184:    is also entered.  These are made to point at each other
                    185:    so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
                    186:    register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression.  */
                    187:    
                    188: /* One plus largest register number used in this function.  */
                    189: 
                    190: static int max_reg;
                    191: 
                    192: /* Length of vectors indexed by quantity number.
                    193:    We know in advance we will not need a quantity number this big.  */
                    194: 
                    195: static int max_qty;
                    196: 
                    197: /* Next quantity number to be allocated.
                    198:    This is 1 + the largest number needed so far.  */
                    199: 
                    200: static int next_qty;
                    201: 
                    202: /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the first (or last) (pseudo) register 
                    203:    in the chain of registers that currently contain this quantity.  */
                    204: 
                    205: static int *qty_first_reg;
                    206: static int *qty_last_reg;
                    207: 
                    208: /* Index by quantity number, gives the mode of the quantity.  */
                    209: 
                    210: static enum machine_mode *qty_mode;
                    211: 
                    212: /* Indexed by quantity number, gives the rtx of the constant value of the
                    213:    quantity, or zero if it does not have a known value.
                    214:    A sum of the frame pointer (or arg pointer) plus a constant
                    215:    can also be entered here.  */
                    216: 
                    217: static rtx *qty_const;
                    218: 
                    219: /* Indexed by qty number, gives the insn that stored the constant value
                    220:    recorded in `qty_const'.  */
                    221: 
                    222: static rtx *qty_const_insn;
                    223: 
                    224: /* The next three variables are used to track when a comparison between a
                    225:    quantity and some constant or register has been passed.  In that case, we
                    226:    know the results of the comparison in case we see it again.  These variables
                    227:    record a comparison that is known to be true.  */
                    228: 
                    229: /* Indexed by qty number, gives the rtx code of a comparison with a known
                    230:    result involving this quantity.  If none, it is UNKNOWN.  */
                    231: static enum rtx_code *qty_comparison_code;
                    232: 
                    233: /* Indexed by qty number, gives the constant being compared against in a
                    234:    comparison of known result.  If no such comparison, it is undefined.
                    235:    If the comparison is not with a constant, it is zero.  */
                    236: 
                    237: static rtx *qty_comparison_const;
                    238: 
                    239: /* Indexed by qty number, gives the quantity being compared against in a
                    240:    comparison of known result.  If no such comparison, if it undefined.
                    241:    If the comparison is not with a register, it is -1.  */
                    242: 
                    243: static int *qty_comparison_qty;
                    244: 
                    245: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                    246: /* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
                    247:    table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
                    248:    its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
                    249: 
                    250:    Instead, we store below the value last assigned to CC0.  If it should
                    251:    happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference to the actual
                    252:    assigned value.  In case it is a constant, we store the mode in which
                    253:    the constant should be interpreted.  */
                    254: 
                    255: static rtx prev_insn_cc0;
                    256: static enum machine_mode prev_insn_cc0_mode;
                    257: #endif
                    258: 
                    259: /* Previous actual insn.  0 if at first insn of basic block.  */
                    260: 
                    261: static rtx prev_insn;
                    262: 
                    263: /* Insn being scanned.  */
                    264: 
                    265: static rtx this_insn;
                    266: 
                    267: /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the quantity number
                    268:    of the register's current contents.  */
                    269: 
                    270: static int *reg_qty;
                    271: 
                    272: /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of the next (or
                    273:    previous) (pseudo) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
                    274:    value.
                    275: 
                    276:    Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
                    277: 
                    278:    If reg_qty[N] == N, reg_next_eqv[N] is undefined.  */
                    279: 
                    280: static int *reg_next_eqv;
                    281: static int *reg_prev_eqv;
                    282: 
                    283: /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of times
                    284:    that register has been altered in the current basic block.  */
                    285: 
                    286: static int *reg_tick;
                    287: 
                    288: /* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the reg_tick value at which
                    289:    rtx's containing this register are valid in the hash table.
                    290:    If this does not equal the current reg_tick value, such expressions
                    291:    existing in the hash table are invalid.
                    292:    If this is -1, no expressions containing this register have been
                    293:    entered in the table.  */
                    294: 
                    295: static int *reg_in_table;
                    296: 
                    297: /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is 
                    298:    currently a REG expression in the hash table.  Note the difference
                    299:    from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
                    300:    expression in the table.  */
                    301: 
                    302: static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
                    303: 
                    304: /* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers that are invalidated
                    305:    by a CALL_INSN.  */
                    306: 
                    307: static HARD_REG_SET regs_invalidated_by_call;
                    308: 
                    309: /* Two vectors of ints:
                    310:    one containing max_reg -1's; the other max_reg + 500 (an approximation
                    311:    for max_qty) elements where element i contains i.
                    312:    These are used to initialize various other vectors fast.  */
                    313: 
                    314: static int *all_minus_one;
                    315: static int *consec_ints;
                    316: 
                    317: /* CUID of insn that starts the basic block currently being cse-processed.  */
                    318: 
                    319: static int cse_basic_block_start;
                    320: 
                    321: /* CUID of insn that ends the basic block currently being cse-processed.  */
                    322: 
                    323: static int cse_basic_block_end;
                    324: 
                    325: /* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids.
                    326:    The cuids are like uids but increase monononically always.
                    327:    We use them to see whether a reg is used outside a given basic block.  */
                    328: 
                    329: static short *uid_cuid;
                    330: 
                    331: /* Get the cuid of an insn.  */
                    332: 
                    333: #define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)])
                    334: 
                    335: /* Nonzero if cse has altered conditional jump insns
                    336:    in such a way that jump optimization should be redone.  */
                    337: 
                    338: static int cse_jumps_altered;
                    339: 
                    340: /* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
                    341:    if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
                    342:    subexpression.  */
                    343: 
                    344: static int do_not_record;
                    345: 
                    346: /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
                    347:    if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed.  */
                    348: 
                    349: static int hash_arg_in_memory;
                    350: 
                    351: /* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
                    352:    if it notices a reference to memory that's part of a structure.  */
                    353: 
                    354: static int hash_arg_in_struct;
                    355: 
                    356: /* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
                    357:    each recording one expression's information.
                    358:    That expression is in the `exp' field.
                    359: 
                    360:    Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
                    361:    through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
                    362: 
                    363:    Each set of expressions with equivalent values
                    364:    are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
                    365:    and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
                    366:    the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
                    367:    that chain.  The chain is in order of increasing cost.
                    368:    Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
                    369: 
                    370:    The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
                    371:    involve any reference to memory.  These elements are removed
                    372:    whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
                    373:    To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
                    374:    the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
                    375:    the frame pointer or argument pointer.
                    376: 
                    377:    The `in_struct' field is nonzero for elements that
                    378:    involve any reference to memory inside a structure or array.
                    379: 
                    380:    The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
                    381:    (that differ by adding an integer).
                    382:    The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
                    383:    `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
                    384:    chain is not useful.
                    385: 
                    386:    The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
                    387: 
                    388:    The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
                    389:    a fixed address).
                    390: 
                    391:    The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
                    392: 
                    393:    The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
                    394:    if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
                    395:    field is the mode it was being used as.  Each constant is
                    396:    recorded separately for each mode it is used with.  */
                    397: 
                    398: 
                    399: struct table_elt
                    400: {
                    401:   rtx exp;
                    402:   struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
                    403:   struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
                    404:   struct table_elt *next_same_value;
                    405:   struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
                    406:   struct table_elt *first_same_value;
                    407:   struct table_elt *related_value;
                    408:   int cost;
                    409:   enum machine_mode mode;
                    410:   char in_memory;
                    411:   char in_struct;
                    412:   char is_const;
                    413:   char flag;
                    414: };
                    415: 
                    416: #define HASHBITS 16
                    417: 
                    418: /* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
                    419:    things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
                    420:    down a lot of loops that happen frequently.  */
                    421: #define NBUCKETS 31
                    422: 
                    423: /* Compute hash code of X in mode M.  Special-case case where X is a pseudo
                    424:    register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set).  */
                    425: 
                    426: #define HASH(X, M)     \
                    427:  (GET_CODE (X) == REG && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER    \
                    428:   ? ((((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[REGNO (X)]) % NBUCKETS)       \
                    429:   : canon_hash (X, M) % NBUCKETS)
                    430: 
                    431: /* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for CSE.
                    432:    It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
                    433:    non-fixed hard regs.
                    434:    A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed,
                    435:    but not if it is an overlapping register.  */
                    436: #ifdef OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
                    437: #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N)  \
                    438:   (((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N])      \
                    439:    && ! OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P ((N)))
                    440: #else
                    441: #define FIXED_REGNO_P(N)  \
                    442:   ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N])
                    443: #endif
                    444: 
                    445: /* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt.  Fixed
                    446:    hard registers are the cheapest with a cost of 0.  Next come pseudos
                    447:    with a cost of one and other hard registers with a cost of 2.  Aside
                    448:    from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'.  */
                    449: 
                    450: #define COST(X)                                                \
                    451:   (GET_CODE (X) == REG                                 \
                    452:    ? (REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1           \
                    453:       : (FIXED_REGNO_P (REGNO (X))                     \
                    454:         && REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (X)) != NO_REGS) ? 0 \
                    455:       : 2)                                             \
                    456:    : rtx_cost (X) * 2)                                 \
                    457: 
                    458: /* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
                    459:    into the `qty_...' variables.  */
                    460: 
                    461: #define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (reg_qty[N] != (N))
                    462: 
                    463: static struct table_elt *table[NBUCKETS];
                    464: 
                    465: /* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
                    466:    but currently removed from the table.  */
                    467: 
                    468: static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
                    469: 
                    470: /* Number of `struct table_elt' structures made so far for this function.  */
                    471: 
                    472: static int n_elements_made;
                    473: 
                    474: /* Maximum value `n_elements_made' has had so far in this compilation
                    475:    for functions previously processed.  */
                    476: 
                    477: static int max_elements_made;
                    478: 
                    479: /* Surviving equivalence class when two equivalence classes are merged 
                    480:    by recording the effects of a jump in the last insn.  Zero if the
                    481:    last insn was not a conditional jump.  */
                    482: 
                    483: static struct table_elt *last_jump_equiv_class;
                    484: 
                    485: /* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
                    486:    symbolic constant.  If this was found, it means we should try to
                    487:    convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
                    488:    the insn.  */
                    489: 
                    490: static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
                    491: 
                    492: /* Bits describing what kind of values in memory must be invalidated
                    493:    for a particular instruction.  If all three bits are zero,
                    494:    no memory refs need to be invalidated.  Each bit is more powerful
                    495:    than the preceding ones, and if a bit is set then the preceding
                    496:    bits are also set.
                    497: 
                    498:    Here is how the bits are set:
                    499:    Pushing onto the stack invalidates only the stack pointer,
                    500:    writing at a fixed address invalidates only variable addresses,
                    501:    writing in a structure element at variable address
                    502:      invalidates all but scalar variables,
                    503:    and writing in anything else at variable address invalidates everything.  */
                    504: 
                    505: struct write_data
                    506: {
                    507:   int sp : 1;                  /* Invalidate stack pointer. */
                    508:   int var : 1;                 /* Invalidate variable addresses.  */
                    509:   int nonscalar : 1;           /* Invalidate all but scalar variables.  */
                    510:   int all : 1;                 /* Invalidate all memory refs.  */
                    511: };
                    512: 
                    513: /* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer).  We check for
                    514:    virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
                    515:    by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation.  */
                    516: 
                    517: #define FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P(X)                                   \
                    518:   ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == arg_pointer_rtx          \
                    519:    || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx                            \
                    520:    || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx                         \
                    521:    || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
                    522:        && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx                    \
                    523:           || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx                    \
                    524:           || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx             \
                    525:           || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)))
                    526: 
                    527: /* Similar, but also allows reference to the stack pointer.  */
                    528: 
                    529: #define NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P(X)                                 \
                    530:   (FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (X)                                       \
                    531:    || (X) == stack_pointer_rtx                                 \
                    532:    || (X) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx                         \
                    533:    || (X) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx                         \
                    534:    || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
                    535:        && (XEXP (X, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx                    \
                    536:           || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx          \
                    537:           || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
                    538: 
                    539: static struct table_elt *lookup ();
                    540: static void free_element ();
                    541: 
                    542: static int insert_regs ();
                    543: static void rehash_using_reg ();
                    544: static void remove_invalid_refs ();
                    545: static int exp_equiv_p ();
                    546: int refers_to_p ();
                    547: int refers_to_mem_p ();
                    548: static void invalidate_from_clobbers ();
                    549: static int safe_hash ();
                    550: static int canon_hash ();
                    551: static rtx fold_rtx ();
                    552: static rtx equiv_constant ();
                    553: static void record_jump_cond ();
                    554: static void note_mem_written ();
                    555: static int cse_rtx_addr_varies_p ();
                    556: static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args ();
                    557: static void cse_insn ();
                    558: static void cse_set_around_loop ();
                    559: 
                    560: /* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
                    561:    One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
                    562:    Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
                    563:    Other uses like the latter are expected in the future.  */
                    564: 
                    565: /* Return the right cost to give to an operation
                    566:    to make the cost of the corresponding register-to-register instruction
                    567:    N times that of a fast register-to-register instruction.  */
                    568: 
                    569: #define COSTS_N_INSNS(N) ((N) * 4 - 2)
                    570: 
                    571: int
                    572: rtx_cost (x)
                    573:      rtx x;
                    574: {
                    575:   register int i, j;
                    576:   register enum rtx_code code;
                    577:   register char *fmt;
                    578:   register int total;
                    579: 
                    580:   if (x == 0)
                    581:     return 0;
                    582: 
                    583:   /* Compute the default costs of certain things.
                    584:      Note that RTX_COSTS can override the defaults.  */
                    585: 
                    586:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                    587:   switch (code)
                    588:     {
                    589:     case MULT:
                    590:       /* Count multiplication by 2**n as a shift,
                    591:         because if we are considering it, we would output it as a shift.  */
                    592:       if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT
                    593:          && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0)
                    594:        total = 2;
                    595:       else
                    596:        total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
                    597:       break;
                    598:     case DIV:
                    599:     case UDIV:
                    600:     case MOD:
                    601:     case UMOD:
                    602:       total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
                    603:       break;
                    604:     case USE:
                    605:       /* Used in loop.c and combine.c as a marker.  */
                    606:       total = 0;
                    607:       break;
                    608:     default:
                    609:       total = 2;
                    610:     }
                    611: 
                    612:   switch (code)
                    613:     {
                    614:     case REG:
                    615:       return 1;
                    616:     case SUBREG:
                    617:       return 2;
                    618: #ifdef RTX_COSTS
                    619:       RTX_COSTS (x, code);
                    620: #endif 
                    621:       CONST_COSTS (x, code);
                    622:     }
                    623: 
                    624:   /* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
                    625:      which is already in total.  */
                    626: 
                    627:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                    628:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                    629:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                    630:       total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i));
                    631:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                    632:       for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                    633:        total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
                    634: 
                    635:   return total;
                    636: }
                    637: 
                    638: /* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
                    639:    for a new basic block.  */
                    640: 
                    641: static void
                    642: new_basic_block ()
                    643: {
                    644:   register int i;
                    645: 
                    646:   next_qty = max_reg;
                    647: 
                    648:   bzero (reg_tick, max_reg * sizeof (int));
                    649: 
                    650:   bcopy (all_minus_one, reg_in_table, max_reg * sizeof (int));
                    651:   bcopy (consec_ints, reg_qty, max_reg * sizeof (int));
                    652:   CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
                    653: 
                    654:   /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
                    655:      much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'.  */
                    656: 
                    657:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                    658:     {
                    659:       register struct table_elt *this, *next;
                    660:       for (this = table[i]; this; this = next)
                    661:        {
                    662:          next = this->next_same_hash;
                    663:          free_element (this);
                    664:        }
                    665:     }
                    666: 
                    667:   bzero (table, sizeof table);
                    668: 
                    669:   prev_insn = 0;
                    670: 
                    671: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                    672:   prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
                    673: #endif
                    674: }
                    675: 
                    676: /* Say that register REG contains a quantity not in any register before
                    677:    and initialize that quantity.  */
                    678: 
                    679: static void
                    680: make_new_qty (reg)
                    681:      register int reg;
                    682: {
                    683:   register int q;
                    684: 
                    685:   if (next_qty >= max_qty)
                    686:     abort ();
                    687: 
                    688:   q = reg_qty[reg] = next_qty++;
                    689:   qty_first_reg[q] = reg;
                    690:   qty_last_reg[q] = reg;
                    691:   qty_const[q] = qty_const_insn[q] = 0;
                    692:   qty_comparison_code[q] = UNKNOWN;
                    693: 
                    694:   reg_next_eqv[reg] = reg_prev_eqv[reg] = -1;
                    695: }
                    696: 
                    697: /* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
                    698:    OLD is not changing; NEW is.  */
                    699: 
                    700: static void
                    701: make_regs_eqv (new, old)
                    702:      register int new, old;
                    703: {
                    704:   register int lastr, firstr;
                    705:   register int q = reg_qty[old];
                    706: 
                    707:   /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number.  */
                    708:   if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old))
                    709:     abort ();
                    710: 
                    711:   reg_qty[new] = q;
                    712:   firstr = qty_first_reg[q];
                    713:   lastr = qty_last_reg[q];
                    714: 
                    715:   /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything.  Prefer pseudo regs to other
                    716:      hard regs.  Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
                    717:      of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
                    718:      make it the new canonical replacement for this qty.  */
                    719:   if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
                    720:       /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS.  This means
                    721:         that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
                    722:         they cannot be used in substitutions or cannonicallizations
                    723:         either.  */
                    724:       && (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new) != NO_REGS)
                    725:       && ((new < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new))
                    726:          || (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                    727:              && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                    728:                  || ((uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]] > cse_basic_block_end
                    729:                       || (uid_cuid[regno_first_uid[new]]
                    730:                           < cse_basic_block_start))
                    731:                      && (uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]]
                    732:                          > uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[firstr]]))))))
                    733:     {
                    734:       reg_prev_eqv[firstr] = new;
                    735:       reg_next_eqv[new] = firstr;
                    736:       reg_prev_eqv[new] = -1;
                    737:       qty_first_reg[q] = new;
                    738:     }
                    739:   else
                    740:     {
                    741:       /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
                    742:         Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
                    743:         end.  Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
                    744:         equivalent for anything.  */
                    745:       while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_prev_eqv[lastr] >= 0
                    746:             && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
                    747:             && new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                    748:        lastr = reg_prev_eqv[lastr];
                    749:       reg_next_eqv[new] = reg_next_eqv[lastr];
                    750:       if (reg_next_eqv[lastr] >= 0)
                    751:        reg_prev_eqv[reg_next_eqv[lastr]] = new;
                    752:       else
                    753:        qty_last_reg[q] = new;
                    754:       reg_next_eqv[lastr] = new;
                    755:       reg_prev_eqv[new] = lastr;
                    756:     }
                    757: }
                    758: 
                    759: /* Remove REG from its equivalence class.  */
                    760: 
                    761: static void
                    762: delete_reg_equiv (reg)
                    763:      register int reg;
                    764: {
                    765:   register int n = reg_next_eqv[reg];
                    766:   register int p = reg_prev_eqv[reg];
                    767:   register int q = reg_qty[reg];
                    768: 
                    769:   /* If invalid, do nothing.  N and P above are undefined in that case.  */
                    770:   if (q == reg)
                    771:     return;
                    772: 
                    773:   if (n != -1)
                    774:     reg_prev_eqv[n] = p;
                    775:   else
                    776:     qty_last_reg[q] = p;
                    777:   if (p != -1)
                    778:     reg_next_eqv[p] = n;
                    779:   else
                    780:     qty_first_reg[q] = n;
                    781: 
                    782:   reg_qty[reg] = reg;
                    783: }
                    784: 
                    785: /* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
                    786:    that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
                    787: 
                    788:    Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
                    789:    as subexpressions will be considered valid.
                    790: 
                    791:    mention_regs is not called when a register itself
                    792:    is being stored in the table.
                    793: 
                    794:    Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
                    795:    of X.  */
                    796: 
                    797: static int
                    798: mention_regs (x)
                    799:      rtx x;
                    800: {
                    801:   register enum rtx_code code;
                    802:   register int i, j;
                    803:   register char *fmt;
                    804:   register int changed = 0;
                    805: 
                    806:   if (x == 0)
                    807:     return;
                    808: 
                    809:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                    810:   if (code == REG)
                    811:     {
                    812:       register int regno = REGNO (x);
                    813:       register int endregno
                    814:        = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
                    815:                   : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)));
                    816:       int i;
                    817: 
                    818:       for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
                    819:        {
                    820:          if (reg_in_table[i] >= 0 && reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
                    821:            remove_invalid_refs (i);
                    822: 
                    823:          reg_in_table[i] = reg_tick[i];
                    824:        }
                    825: 
                    826:       return 0;
                    827:     }
                    828: 
                    829:   /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
                    830:      that does not have a quantity, give it one.  This is so that a later
                    831:      call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
                    832:      hash code and not found in the table after that call.
                    833: 
                    834:      It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
                    835:      fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
                    836:      call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
                    837:      use of the register is in the comparison.  */
                    838: 
                    839:   if (code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
                    840:     {
                    841:       if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
                    842:          && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
                    843:        if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), 0, 0))
                    844:          {
                    845:            rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
                    846:            changed = 1;
                    847:          }
                    848: 
                    849:       if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == REG
                    850:          && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
                    851:        if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), 0, 0))
                    852:          {
                    853:            rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
                    854:            changed = 1;
                    855:          }
                    856:     }
                    857: 
                    858:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                    859:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                    860:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                    861:       changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
                    862:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                    863:       for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                    864:        changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
                    865: 
                    866:   return changed;
                    867: }
                    868: 
                    869: /* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
                    870:    with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
                    871:    (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
                    872:    If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
                    873:    Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
                    874:    before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
                    875: 
                    876:    Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
                    877:    so X's hash code may be different.  */
                    878: 
                    879: static int
                    880: insert_regs (x, classp, modified)
                    881:      rtx x;
                    882:      struct table_elt *classp;
                    883:      int modified;
                    884: {
                    885:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
                    886:     {
                    887:       register int regno = REGNO (x);
                    888: 
                    889:       if (modified
                    890:          || ! (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno)
                    891:                && qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] == GET_MODE (x)))
                    892:        {
                    893:          if (classp)
                    894:            for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
                    895:                 classp != 0;
                    896:                 classp = classp->next_same_value)
                    897:              if (GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG
                    898:                  && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
                    899:                {
                    900:                  make_regs_eqv (regno, REGNO (classp->exp));
                    901:                  return 1;
                    902:                }
                    903: 
                    904:          make_new_qty (regno);
                    905:          qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] = GET_MODE (x);
                    906:          return 1;
                    907:        }
                    908:     }
                    909:   else
                    910:     return mention_regs (x);
                    911: }
                    912: 
                    913: /* Look in or update the hash table.  */
                    914: 
                    915: /* Put the element ELT on the list of free elements.  */
                    916: 
                    917: static void
                    918: free_element (elt)
                    919:      struct table_elt *elt;
                    920: {
                    921:   elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
                    922:   free_element_chain = elt;
                    923: }
                    924: 
                    925: /* Return an element that is free for use.  */
                    926: 
                    927: static struct table_elt *
                    928: get_element ()
                    929: {
                    930:   struct table_elt *elt = free_element_chain;
                    931:   if (elt)
                    932:     {
                    933:       free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
                    934:       return elt;
                    935:     }
                    936:   n_elements_made++;
                    937:   return (struct table_elt *) oballoc (sizeof (struct table_elt));
                    938: }
                    939: 
                    940: /* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
                    941:    HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
                    942:    It's an argument because often that is known in advance
                    943:    and we save much time not recomputing it.  */
                    944: 
                    945: static void
                    946: remove_from_table (elt, hash)
                    947:      register struct table_elt *elt;
                    948:      int hash;
                    949: {
                    950:   if (elt == 0)
                    951:     return;
                    952: 
                    953:   /* Mark this element as removed.  See cse_insn.  */
                    954:   elt->first_same_value = 0;
                    955: 
                    956:   /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class.  */
                    957:      
                    958:   {
                    959:     register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
                    960:     register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
                    961: 
                    962:     if (next) next->prev_same_value = prev;
                    963: 
                    964:     if (prev)
                    965:       prev->next_same_value = next;
                    966:     else
                    967:       {
                    968:        register struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
                    969:        while (next)
                    970:          {
                    971:            next->first_same_value = newfirst;
                    972:            next = next->next_same_value;
                    973:          }
                    974:       }
                    975:   }
                    976: 
                    977:   /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket.  */
                    978: 
                    979:   {
                    980:     register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
                    981:     register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
                    982: 
                    983:     if (next) next->prev_same_hash = prev;
                    984: 
                    985:     if (prev)
                    986:       prev->next_same_hash = next;
                    987:     else if (table[hash] == elt)
                    988:       table[hash] = next;
                    989:     else
                    990:       {
                    991:        /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket.  This can happen
                    992:           when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'.  Search
                    993:           for the hash bucket that it heads.  This happens only very
                    994:           rarely, so the cost is acceptable.  */
                    995:        for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
                    996:          if (table[hash] == elt)
                    997:            table[hash] = next;
                    998:       }
                    999:   }
                   1000: 
                   1001:   /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain.  */
                   1002: 
                   1003:   if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
                   1004:     {
                   1005:       register struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
                   1006:       while (p->related_value != elt)
                   1007:        p = p->related_value;
                   1008:       p->related_value = elt->related_value;
                   1009:       if (p->related_value == p)
                   1010:        p->related_value = 0;
                   1011:     }
                   1012: 
                   1013:   free_element (elt);
                   1014: }
                   1015: 
                   1016: /* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
                   1017:    or 0 if X is not in the table.
                   1018: 
                   1019:    MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
                   1020:    with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
                   1021: 
                   1022:    Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
                   1023:    looks like X.  */
                   1024: 
                   1025: static struct table_elt *
                   1026: lookup (x, hash, mode)
                   1027:      rtx x;
                   1028:      int hash;
                   1029:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1030: {
                   1031:   register struct table_elt *p;
                   1032: 
                   1033:   for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
                   1034:     if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
                   1035:                            || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, GET_CODE (x) != REG, 0)))
                   1036:       return p;
                   1037: 
                   1038:   return 0;
                   1039: }
                   1040: 
                   1041: /* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
                   1042:    Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register.  */
                   1043: 
                   1044: static struct table_elt *
                   1045: lookup_for_remove (x, hash, mode)
                   1046:      rtx x;
                   1047:      int hash;
                   1048:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1049: {
                   1050:   register struct table_elt *p;
                   1051: 
                   1052:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
                   1053:     {
                   1054:       int regno = REGNO (x);
                   1055:       /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
                   1056:         invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0).  */
                   1057:       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
                   1058:        if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
                   1059:            && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
                   1060:          return p;
                   1061:     }
                   1062:   else
                   1063:     {
                   1064:       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
                   1065:        if (mode == p->mode && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, 0)))
                   1066:          return p;
                   1067:     }
                   1068: 
                   1069:   return 0;
                   1070: }
                   1071: 
                   1072: /* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
                   1073:    If one is found, return that expression.  */
                   1074: 
                   1075: static rtx
                   1076: lookup_as_function (x, code)
                   1077:      rtx x;
                   1078:      enum rtx_code code;
                   1079: {
                   1080:   register struct table_elt *p = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, VOIDmode) % NBUCKETS,
                   1081:                                         GET_MODE (x));
                   1082:   if (p == 0)
                   1083:     return 0;
                   1084: 
                   1085:   for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   1086:     {
                   1087:       if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
                   1088:          /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table.  */
                   1089:          && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
                   1090:        return p->exp;
                   1091:     }
                   1092:   
                   1093:   return 0;
                   1094: }
                   1095: 
                   1096: /* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code
                   1097:    and CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in
                   1098:    (or 0 if a new class should be made).
                   1099:    It is inserted at the proper position to keep the class in
                   1100:    the order cheapest first.
                   1101: 
                   1102:    MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
                   1103:    with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
                   1104: 
                   1105:    For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
                   1106:    goes in front, except that the first element in the list
                   1107:    remains first unless a cheaper element is added.  The order of
                   1108:    pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
                   1109:    find the cheapest when a register is retreived from the table.
                   1110: 
                   1111:    The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
                   1112:    The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
                   1113: 
                   1114:    You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
                   1115:    and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
                   1116:    you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
                   1117: 
                   1118:    If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities.  */
                   1119: 
                   1120: #define CHEAPER(X,Y)   ((X)->cost < (Y)->cost)
                   1121: 
                   1122: static struct table_elt *
                   1123: insert (x, classp, hash, mode)
                   1124:      register rtx x;
                   1125:      register struct table_elt *classp;
                   1126:      int hash;
                   1127:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1128: {
                   1129:   register struct table_elt *elt;
                   1130: 
                   1131:   /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
                   1132:      something is wrong.  */
                   1133:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
                   1134:     abort ();
                   1135: 
                   1136:   /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table.  */
                   1137:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1138:     {
                   1139:       int regno = REGNO (x);
                   1140:       int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
                   1141:       int i;
                   1142: 
                   1143:       for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
                   1144:            SET_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
                   1145:     }
                   1146: 
                   1147: 
                   1148:   /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket.  */
                   1149: 
                   1150:   elt = get_element ();
                   1151:   elt->exp = x;
                   1152:   elt->cost = COST (x);
                   1153:   elt->next_same_value = 0;
                   1154:   elt->prev_same_value = 0;
                   1155:   elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
                   1156:   elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
                   1157:   elt->related_value = 0;
                   1158:   elt->in_memory = 0;
                   1159:   elt->mode = mode;
                   1160:   elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x)
                   1161:                   /* GNU C++ takes advantage of this for `this'
                   1162:                      (and other const values).  */
                   1163:                   || (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
                   1164:                       && GET_CODE (x) == REG
                   1165:                       && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1166:                   || FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (x));
                   1167: 
                   1168:   if (table[hash])
                   1169:     table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
                   1170:   table[hash] = elt;
                   1171: 
                   1172:   /* Put it into the proper value-class.  */
                   1173:   if (classp)
                   1174:     {
                   1175:       classp = classp->first_same_value;
                   1176:       if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
                   1177:        /* Insert at the head of the class */
                   1178:        {
                   1179:          register struct table_elt *p;
                   1180:          elt->next_same_value = classp;
                   1181:          classp->prev_same_value = elt;
                   1182:          elt->first_same_value = elt;
                   1183: 
                   1184:          for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   1185:            p->first_same_value = elt;
                   1186:        }
                   1187:       else
                   1188:        {
                   1189:          /* Insert not at head of the class.  */
                   1190:          /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X.  */
                   1191:          register struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1192:          for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
                   1193:               p = next);
                   1194:          /* Put it after P and before NEXT.  */
                   1195:          elt->next_same_value = next;
                   1196:          if (next)
                   1197:            next->prev_same_value = elt;
                   1198:          elt->prev_same_value = p;
                   1199:          p->next_same_value = elt;
                   1200:          elt->first_same_value = classp;
                   1201:        }
                   1202:     }
                   1203:   else
                   1204:     elt->first_same_value = elt;
                   1205: 
                   1206:   /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
                   1207:      being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
                   1208: 
                   1209:      If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
                   1210:      and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register.  So
                   1211:      we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
                   1212:      inserted).
                   1213: 
                   1214:      If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
                   1215:      constant, we must check the entire class.
                   1216: 
                   1217:      If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
                   1218:      update `qty_const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
                   1219:      insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant.  */
                   1220: 
                   1221:   if (elt->is_const && classp && GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG)
                   1222:     {
                   1223:       qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]]
                   1224:        = gen_lowpart_if_possible (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]], x);
                   1225:       qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]] = this_insn;
                   1226:     }
                   1227: 
                   1228:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && classp && ! qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
                   1229:     {
                   1230:       register struct table_elt *p;
                   1231: 
                   1232:       for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
                   1233:        {
                   1234:          if (p->is_const)
                   1235:            {
                   1236:              qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
                   1237:                = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
                   1238:              qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
                   1239:              break;
                   1240:            }
                   1241:        }
                   1242:     }
                   1243: 
                   1244:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
                   1245:           && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
                   1246:     qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
                   1247: 
                   1248:   /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
                   1249:      and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
                   1250:      link it up with related expressions.  */
                   1251:   if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
                   1252:     {
                   1253:       rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
                   1254:       int subhash;
                   1255:       struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
                   1256: 
                   1257:       if (subexp != 0)
                   1258:        {
                   1259:          /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table.  */
                   1260:          subhash = safe_hash (subexp, mode) % NBUCKETS;
                   1261:          subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
                   1262:          if (subelt == 0)
                   1263:            subelt = insert (subexp, 0, subhash, mode);
                   1264:          /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none.  */
                   1265:          if (subelt->related_value == 0)
                   1266:            subelt->related_value = subelt;
                   1267:          /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT.  */
                   1268:          subelt_prev = subelt;
                   1269:          while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
                   1270:            subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
                   1271:          /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
                   1272:             This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one.  */
                   1273:          elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
                   1274:          subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
                   1275:        }
                   1276:     }
                   1277: 
                   1278:   return elt;
                   1279: }
                   1280: 
                   1281: /* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
                   1282:    CLASS2 into CLASS1.  This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
                   1283:    the two classes equivalent.
                   1284: 
                   1285:    CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
                   1286:    call.
                   1287: 
                   1288:    Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied.  */
                   1289: 
                   1290: static void
                   1291: merge_equiv_classes (class1, class2)
                   1292:      struct table_elt *class1, *class2;
                   1293: {
                   1294:   struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new;
                   1295: 
                   1296:   /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes.  */
                   1297:   class1 = class1->first_same_value;
                   1298:   class2 = class2->first_same_value;
                   1299: 
                   1300:   /* If they were already equal, forget it.  */
                   1301:   if (class1 == class2)
                   1302:     return;
                   1303: 
                   1304:   for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
                   1305:     {
                   1306:       int hash;
                   1307:       rtx exp = elt->exp;
                   1308:       enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
                   1309: 
                   1310:       next = elt->next_same_value;
                   1311: 
                   1312:       /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
                   1313:         Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
                   1314:         hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
                   1315:       if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, 0))
                   1316:        {
                   1317:          hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   1318:          hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   1319:          hash = HASH (exp, mode);
                   1320:              
                   1321:          if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG)
                   1322:            delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
                   1323:              
                   1324:          remove_from_table (elt, hash);
                   1325: 
                   1326:          if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0))
                   1327:            hash = HASH (exp, mode);
                   1328:          new = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
                   1329:          new->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   1330:          new->in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   1331:        }
                   1332:     }
                   1333: }
                   1334: 
                   1335: /* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid,
                   1336:    all expressions whose values could be altered by storing in X.
                   1337:    X is a register, a subreg, or a memory reference with nonvarying address
                   1338:    (because, when a memory reference with a varying address is stored in,
                   1339:    all memory references are removed by invalidate_memory
                   1340:    so specific invalidation is superfluous).
                   1341: 
                   1342:    A nonvarying address may be just a register or just
                   1343:    a symbol reference, or it may be either of those plus
                   1344:    a numeric offset.  */
                   1345: 
                   1346: static void
                   1347: invalidate (x)
                   1348:      rtx x;
                   1349: {
                   1350:   register int i;
                   1351:   register struct table_elt *p;
                   1352:   register rtx base;
                   1353:   register int start, end;
                   1354: 
                   1355:   /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents
                   1356:      are recorded through the qty number mechanism.
                   1357:      Just change the qty number of the register,
                   1358:      mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
                   1359:      and remove it itself.  */
                   1360: 
                   1361:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
                   1362:     {
                   1363:       register int regno = REGNO (x);
                   1364:       register int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
                   1365: 
                   1366:       /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
                   1367:         that it's value might have changed.  If it is a pseudo, remove its
                   1368:         entry from the hash table.
                   1369: 
                   1370:         For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
                   1371:         additional hard registers corresponding to X.  Then, if any of these
                   1372:         registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
                   1373:         overlap these registers.  */
                   1374: 
                   1375:       delete_reg_equiv (regno);
                   1376:       reg_tick[regno]++;
                   1377: 
                   1378:       if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1379:        remove_from_table (lookup_for_remove (x, hash, GET_MODE (x)), hash);
                   1380:       else
                   1381:        {
                   1382:          int in_table = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
                   1383:          int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
                   1384:          int tregno, tendregno;
                   1385:          register struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1386: 
                   1387:          CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
                   1388: 
                   1389:          for (i = regno + 1; i < endregno; i++)
                   1390:            {
                   1391:              in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
                   1392:              CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
                   1393:              delete_reg_equiv (i);
                   1394:              reg_tick[i]++;
                   1395:            }
                   1396: 
                   1397:          if (in_table)
                   1398:            for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
                   1399:              for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
                   1400:                {
                   1401:                  next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1402: 
                   1403:                  if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
                   1404:                      || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1405:                    continue;
                   1406: 
                   1407:                  tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
                   1408:                  tendregno
                   1409:                    = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
                   1410:                  if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
                   1411:                  remove_from_table (p, hash);
                   1412:                }
                   1413:        }
                   1414: 
                   1415:       return;
                   1416:     }
                   1417: 
                   1418:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
                   1419:     {
                   1420:       if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
                   1421:        abort ();
                   1422:       invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x));
                   1423:       return;
                   1424:     }
                   1425: 
                   1426:   /* X is not a register; it must be a memory reference with
                   1427:      a nonvarying address.  Remove all hash table elements
                   1428:      that refer to overlapping pieces of memory.  */
                   1429: 
                   1430:   if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
                   1431:     abort ();
                   1432:   base = XEXP (x, 0);
                   1433:   start = 0;
                   1434: 
                   1435:   /* Registers with nonvarying addresses usually have constant equivalents;
                   1436:      but the frame pointer register is also possible.  */
                   1437:   if (GET_CODE (base) == REG
                   1438:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (base))
                   1439:       && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] == GET_MODE (base)
                   1440:       && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] != 0)
                   1441:     base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]];
                   1442:   else if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
                   1443:           && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
                   1444:           && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 0)) == REG
                   1445:           && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (base, 0)))
                   1446:           && (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]]
                   1447:               == GET_MODE (XEXP (base, 0)))
                   1448:           && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]])
                   1449:     {
                   1450:       start = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
                   1451:       base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]];
                   1452:     }
                   1453: 
                   1454:   if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
                   1455:     base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   1456:   if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
                   1457:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   1458:     {
                   1459:       start += INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
                   1460:       base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   1461:     }
                   1462: 
                   1463:   end = start + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
                   1464:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                   1465:     {
                   1466:       register struct table_elt *next;
                   1467:       for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
                   1468:        {
                   1469:          next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1470:          if (refers_to_mem_p (p->exp, base, start, end))
                   1471:            remove_from_table (p, i);
                   1472:        }
                   1473:     }
                   1474: }
                   1475: 
                   1476: /* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
                   1477:    since they are already invalid, and we are about to
                   1478:    mark that register valid again and don't want the old
                   1479:    expressions to reappear as valid.  */
                   1480: 
                   1481: static void
                   1482: remove_invalid_refs (regno)
                   1483:      int regno;
                   1484: {
                   1485:   register int i;
                   1486:   register struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1487: 
                   1488:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                   1489:     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
                   1490:       {
                   1491:        next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1492:        if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
                   1493:            && refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, 0))
                   1494:          remove_from_table (p, i);
                   1495:       }
                   1496: }
                   1497: 
                   1498: /* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
                   1499:    reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
                   1500: 
                   1501:    This is called when we make a jump equivalence.  */
                   1502: 
                   1503: static void
                   1504: rehash_using_reg (x)
                   1505:      rtx x;
                   1506: {
                   1507:   int i;
                   1508:   struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1509:   int hash;
                   1510: 
                   1511:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
                   1512:     x = SUBREG_REG (x);
                   1513: 
                   1514:   /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
                   1515:      valid entries in the table, we have no work to do.  */
                   1516: 
                   1517:   if (GET_CODE (x) != REG
                   1518:       || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] < 0
                   1519:       || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] != reg_tick[REGNO (x)])
                   1520:     return;
                   1521: 
                   1522:   /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
                   1523:      If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it.  We can skip
                   1524:      objects that are registers, since they are handled specially.  */
                   1525: 
                   1526:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                   1527:     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
                   1528:       {
                   1529:        next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1530:        if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG && reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
                   1531:            && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1)
                   1532:            && i != (hash = safe_hash (p->exp, p->mode) % NBUCKETS))
                   1533:          {
                   1534:            if (p->next_same_hash)
                   1535:              p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
                   1536: 
                   1537:            if (p->prev_same_hash)
                   1538:              p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
                   1539:            else
                   1540:              table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
                   1541: 
                   1542:            p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
                   1543:            p->prev_same_hash = 0;
                   1544:            if (table[hash])
                   1545:              table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
                   1546:            table[hash] = p;
                   1547:          }
                   1548:       }
                   1549: }
                   1550: 
                   1551: /* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory,
                   1552:    or some of them as specified by *WRITES.  */
                   1553: 
                   1554: static void
                   1555: invalidate_memory (writes)
                   1556:      struct write_data *writes;
                   1557: {
                   1558:   register int i;
                   1559:   register struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1560:   int all = writes->all;
                   1561:   int nonscalar = writes->nonscalar;
                   1562: 
                   1563:   for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
                   1564:     for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
                   1565:       {
                   1566:        next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1567:        if (p->in_memory
                   1568:            && (all
                   1569:                || (nonscalar && p->in_struct)
                   1570:                || cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (p->exp)))
                   1571:          remove_from_table (p, i);
                   1572:       }
                   1573: }
                   1574: 
                   1575: /* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
                   1576:    register.  Also update their TICK values.  */
                   1577: 
                   1578: static void
                   1579: invalidate_for_call ()
                   1580: {
                   1581:   int regno, endregno;
                   1582:   int i;
                   1583:   int hash;
                   1584:   struct table_elt *p, *next;
                   1585:   int in_table = 0;
                   1586: 
                   1587:   /* Go through all the hard registers.  For each that is clobbered in
                   1588:      a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
                   1589:      reg_tick if defined.  Also see if any of these registers is currently
                   1590:      in the table.  */
                   1591: 
                   1592:   for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
                   1593:     if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
                   1594:       {
                   1595:        delete_reg_equiv (regno);
                   1596:        if (reg_tick[regno] >= 0)
                   1597:          reg_tick[regno]++;
                   1598: 
                   1599:        in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
                   1600:       }
                   1601: 
                   1602:   /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
                   1603:      table, we are done.  Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
                   1604:      entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register.  */
                   1605: 
                   1606:   if (in_table)
                   1607:     for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
                   1608:       for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
                   1609:        {
                   1610:          next = p->next_same_hash;
                   1611: 
                   1612:          if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
                   1613:              || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   1614:            continue;
                   1615: 
                   1616:          regno = REGNO (p->exp);
                   1617:          endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
                   1618: 
                   1619:          for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
                   1620:            if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
                   1621:              {
                   1622:                remove_from_table (p, hash);
                   1623:                break;
                   1624:              }
                   1625:        }
                   1626: }
                   1627: 
                   1628: /* Given an expression X of type CONST,
                   1629:    and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
                   1630:    is not in the hash table),
                   1631:    return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
                   1632:    If none can be found, return 0.  */
                   1633: 
                   1634: static rtx
                   1635: use_related_value (x, elt)
                   1636:      rtx x;
                   1637:      struct table_elt *elt;
                   1638: {
                   1639:   register struct table_elt *relt = 0;
                   1640:   register struct table_elt *p, *q;
                   1641:   int offset;
                   1642: 
                   1643:   /* First, is there anything related known?
                   1644:      If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
                   1645:      Otherwise, must look it up.  */
                   1646: 
                   1647:   if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
                   1648:     relt = elt;
                   1649:   else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
                   1650:     {
                   1651:       rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
                   1652:       if (subexp != 0)
                   1653:        relt = lookup (subexp,
                   1654:                       safe_hash (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)) % NBUCKETS,
                   1655:                       GET_MODE (subexp));
                   1656:     }
                   1657: 
                   1658:   if (relt == 0)
                   1659:     return 0;
                   1660: 
                   1661:   /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
                   1662:      equivalent register.  */
                   1663: 
                   1664:   p = relt;
                   1665:   while (1)
                   1666:     {
                   1667:       /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
                   1668:         The first is when X is already in the table.  Then it is searching
                   1669:         the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT).  The second case is when
                   1670:         X is not in the table.  Then RELT points to a class for the related
                   1671:         value.
                   1672: 
                   1673:         Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
                   1674:         the same value as X.  */
                   1675: 
                   1676:       if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
                   1677:        q = 0;
                   1678:       else
                   1679:        for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
                   1680:          if (GET_CODE (q->exp) == REG)
                   1681:            break;
                   1682: 
                   1683:       if (q)
                   1684:        break;
                   1685: 
                   1686:       p = p->related_value;
                   1687: 
                   1688:       /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
                   1689:         Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
                   1690:         and it has no related values recorded.  */
                   1691:       if (p == relt || p == 0)
                   1692:        break;
                   1693:     }
                   1694: 
                   1695:   if (q == 0)
                   1696:     return 0;
                   1697: 
                   1698:   offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
                   1699:   /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity.  */
                   1700:   return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
                   1701: }
                   1702: 
                   1703: /* Hash an rtx.  We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
                   1704:    Equivalent registers hash identically.
                   1705:    MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
                   1706:    otherwise the mode of X is used.
                   1707: 
                   1708:    Store 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
                   1709: 
                   1710:    Store 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a MEM rtx
                   1711:    which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
                   1712:    In this case, also store 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
                   1713:    if there is a MEM rtx which has the MEM_IN_STRUCT_P bit set.
                   1714: 
                   1715:    Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
                   1716:    is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address.  */
                   1717: 
                   1718: static int
                   1719: canon_hash (x, mode)
                   1720:      rtx x;
                   1721:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1722: {
                   1723:   register int i, j;
                   1724:   register int hash = 0;
                   1725:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   1726:   register char *fmt;
                   1727: 
                   1728:   /* repeat is used to turn tail-recursion into iteration.  */
                   1729:  repeat:
                   1730:   if (x == 0)
                   1731:     return hash;
                   1732: 
                   1733:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   1734:   switch (code)
                   1735:     {
                   1736:     case REG:
                   1737:       {
                   1738:        register int regno = REGNO (x);
                   1739: 
                   1740:        /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
                   1741:           because extending its life will cause reload problems.  We
                   1742:           consider ap, fp, and sp to be fixed for this purpose.
                   1743:           On all machines, we can't record any global registers. */
                   1744: 
                   1745:        if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   1746:            && (global_regs[regno]
                   1747: #ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
                   1748:                || (! fixed_regs[regno]
                   1749:                    && regno != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1750:                    && regno != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
                   1751:                    && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
                   1752: #endif
                   1753:                ))
                   1754:          {
                   1755:            do_not_record = 1;
                   1756:            return 0;
                   1757:          }
                   1758:        return hash + ((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[regno];
                   1759:       }
                   1760: 
                   1761:     case CONST_INT:
                   1762:       hash += ((int) mode + ((int) CONST_INT << 7)
                   1763:               + INTVAL (x) + (INTVAL (x) >> HASHBITS));
                   1764:       return ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & hash;
                   1765: 
                   1766:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   1767:       /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
                   1768:         the integers representing the constant.  */
                   1769:       hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
                   1770:       {
                   1771:        int i;
                   1772:        for (i = 2; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (CONST_DOUBLE); i++)
                   1773:          {
                   1774:            int tem = XINT (x, i);
                   1775:            hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
                   1776:          }
                   1777:       }
                   1778:       return hash;
                   1779: 
                   1780:       /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label.  */
                   1781:     case LABEL_REF:
                   1782:       /* Use `and' to ensure a positive number.  */
                   1783:       return (hash + ((int) LABEL_REF << 7)
                   1784:              + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
                   1785: 
                   1786:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   1787:       return (hash + ((int) SYMBOL_REF << 7)
                   1788:              + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
                   1789: 
                   1790:     case MEM:
                   1791:       if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
                   1792:        {
                   1793:          do_not_record = 1;
                   1794:          return 0;
                   1795:        }
                   1796:       if (! RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x))
                   1797:        {
                   1798:          hash_arg_in_memory = 1;
                   1799:          if (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x)) hash_arg_in_struct = 1;
                   1800:        }
                   1801:       /* Now that we have already found this special case,
                   1802:         might as well speed it up as much as possible.  */
                   1803:       hash += (int) MEM;
                   1804:       x = XEXP (x, 0);
                   1805:       goto repeat;
                   1806: 
                   1807:     case PRE_DEC:
                   1808:     case PRE_INC:
                   1809:     case POST_DEC:
                   1810:     case POST_INC:
                   1811:     case PC:
                   1812:     case CC0:
                   1813:     case CALL:
                   1814:     case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
                   1815:       do_not_record = 1;
                   1816:       return 0;
                   1817: 
                   1818:     case ASM_OPERANDS:
                   1819:       if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
                   1820:        {
                   1821:          do_not_record = 1;
                   1822:          return 0;
                   1823:        }
                   1824:     }
                   1825: 
                   1826:   i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
                   1827:   hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
                   1828:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   1829:   for (; i >= 0; i--)
                   1830:     {
                   1831:       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   1832:        {
                   1833:          rtx tem = XEXP (x, i);
                   1834:          rtx tem1;
                   1835: 
                   1836:          /* If the operand is a REG that is equivalent to a constant, hash
                   1837:             as if we were hashing the constant, since we will be comparing
                   1838:             that way.  */
                   1839:          if (tem != 0 && GET_CODE (tem) == REG
                   1840:              && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (tem))
                   1841:              && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]] == GET_MODE (tem)
                   1842:              && (tem1 = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]]) != 0
                   1843:              && CONSTANT_P (tem1))
                   1844:            tem = tem1;
                   1845: 
                   1846:          /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
                   1847:             needed at this level, change it into iteration.
                   1848:             This function  is called enough to be worth it.  */
                   1849:          if (i == 0)
                   1850:            {
                   1851:              x = tem;
                   1852:              goto repeat;
                   1853:            }
                   1854:          hash += canon_hash (tem, 0);
                   1855:        }
                   1856:       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   1857:        for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   1858:          hash += canon_hash (XVECEXP (x, i, j), 0);
                   1859:       else if (fmt[i] == 's')
                   1860:        {
                   1861:          register char *p = XSTR (x, i);
                   1862:          if (p)
                   1863:            while (*p)
                   1864:              {
                   1865:                register int tem = *p++;
                   1866:                hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
                   1867:              }
                   1868:        }
                   1869:       else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
                   1870:        {
                   1871:          register int tem = XINT (x, i);
                   1872:          hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
                   1873:        }
                   1874:       else
                   1875:        abort ();
                   1876:     }
                   1877:   return hash;
                   1878: }
                   1879: 
                   1880: /* Like canon_hash but with no side effects.  */
                   1881: 
                   1882: static int
                   1883: safe_hash (x, mode)
                   1884:      rtx x;
                   1885:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1886: {
                   1887:   int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
                   1888:   int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   1889:   int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   1890:   int hash = canon_hash (x, mode);
                   1891:   hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
                   1892:   hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
                   1893:   do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
                   1894:   return hash;
                   1895: }
                   1896: 
                   1897: /* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
                   1898:    without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
                   1899:    If VALIDATE is nonzero,
                   1900:    we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
                   1901:    and Y was found in the hash table.  We check register refs
                   1902:    in Y for being marked as valid.
                   1903: 
                   1904:    If EQUAL_VALUES is nonzero, we allow a register to match a constant value
                   1905:    that is known to be in the register.  Ordinarily, we don't allow them
                   1906:    to match, because letting them match would cause unpredictable results
                   1907:    in all the places that search a hash table chain for an equivalent
                   1908:    for a given value.  A possible equivalent that has different structure
                   1909:    has its hash code computed from different data.  Whether the hash code
                   1910:    is the same as that of the the given value is pure luck.  */
                   1911: 
                   1912: static int
                   1913: exp_equiv_p (x, y, validate, equal_values)
                   1914:      rtx x, y;
                   1915:      int validate;
                   1916:      int equal_values;
                   1917: {
                   1918:   register int i;
                   1919:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   1920:   register char *fmt;
                   1921: 
                   1922:   /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
                   1923:      if VALIDATE is nonzero.  */
                   1924:   if (x == y && !validate)
                   1925:     return 1;
                   1926:   if (x == 0 || y == 0)
                   1927:     return x == y;
                   1928: 
                   1929:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   1930:   if (code != GET_CODE (y))
                   1931:     {
                   1932:       if (!equal_values)
                   1933:        return 0;
                   1934: 
                   1935:       /* If X is a constant and Y is a register or vice versa, they may be
                   1936:         equivalent.  We only have to validate if Y is a register.  */
                   1937:       if (CONSTANT_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == REG
                   1938:          && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (y))
                   1939:          && GET_MODE (y) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]]
                   1940:          && rtx_equal_p (x, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]])
                   1941:          && (! validate || reg_in_table[REGNO (y)] == reg_tick[REGNO (y)]))
                   1942:        return 1;
                   1943: 
                   1944:       if (CONSTANT_P (y) && code == REG
                   1945:          && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
                   1946:          && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
                   1947:          && rtx_equal_p (y, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]))
                   1948:        return 1;
                   1949: 
                   1950:       return 0;
                   1951:     }
                   1952: 
                   1953:   /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent.  */
                   1954:   if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
                   1955:     return 0;
                   1956: 
                   1957:   switch (code)
                   1958:     {
                   1959:     case PC:
                   1960:     case CC0:
                   1961:       return x == y;
                   1962: 
                   1963:     case CONST_INT:
                   1964:       return XINT (x, 0) == XINT (y, 0);
                   1965: 
                   1966:     case LABEL_REF:
                   1967:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   1968:       return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
                   1969: 
                   1970:     case REG:
                   1971:       {
                   1972:        int regno = REGNO (y);
                   1973:        int endregno
                   1974:          = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
                   1975:                     : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (y)));
                   1976:        int i;
                   1977: 
                   1978:        /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
                   1979:           equivalent.  If there are and we are not to validate, they
                   1980:           are equivalent.  Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date.  */
                   1981: 
                   1982:        if (reg_qty[REGNO (x)] != reg_qty[regno])
                   1983:          return 0;
                   1984: 
                   1985:        if (! validate)
                   1986:          return 1;
                   1987: 
                   1988:        for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
                   1989:          if (reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
                   1990:            return 0;
                   1991: 
                   1992:        return 1;
                   1993:       }
                   1994: 
                   1995:     /*  For commutative operations, check both orders.  */
                   1996:     case PLUS:
                   1997:     case MULT:
                   1998:     case AND:
                   1999:     case IOR:
                   2000:     case XOR:
                   2001:     case NE:
                   2002:     case EQ:
                   2003:       return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0), validate, equal_values)
                   2004:               && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
                   2005:                               validate, equal_values))
                   2006:              || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
                   2007:                               validate, equal_values)
                   2008:                  && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
                   2009:                                  validate, equal_values)));
                   2010:     }
                   2011: 
                   2012:   /* Compare the elements.  If any pair of corresponding elements
                   2013:      fail to match, return 0 for the whole things.  */
                   2014: 
                   2015:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   2016:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   2017:     {
                   2018:       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   2019:        {
                   2020:          if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i), validate, equal_values))
                   2021:            return 0;
                   2022:        }
                   2023:       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   2024:        {
                   2025:          int j;
                   2026:          if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
                   2027:            return 0;
                   2028:          for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   2029:            if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
                   2030:                               validate, equal_values))
                   2031:              return 0;
                   2032:        }
                   2033:       else if (fmt[i] == 's')
                   2034:        {
                   2035:          if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
                   2036:            return 0;
                   2037:        }
                   2038:       else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
                   2039:        {
                   2040:          if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
                   2041:            return 0;
                   2042:        }
                   2043:       else if (fmt[i] != '0')
                   2044:        abort ();
                   2045:     }
                   2046:   return 1;
                   2047: }
                   2048: 
                   2049: /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X matches Y.
                   2050:    Here we do not require that X or Y be valid (for registers referred to)
                   2051:    for being in the hash table.  */
                   2052: 
                   2053: int
                   2054: refers_to_p (x, y)
                   2055:      rtx x, y;
                   2056: {
                   2057:   register int i;
                   2058:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   2059:   register char *fmt;
                   2060: 
                   2061:  repeat:
                   2062:   if (x == y)
                   2063:     return 1;
                   2064:   if (x == 0 || y == 0)
                   2065:     return 0;
                   2066: 
                   2067:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   2068:   /* If X as a whole has the same code as Y, they may match.
                   2069:      If so, return 1.  */
                   2070:   if (code == GET_CODE (y))
                   2071:     {
                   2072:       if (exp_equiv_p (x, y, 0, 1))
                   2073:        return 1;
                   2074:     }
                   2075: 
                   2076:   /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions.  */
                   2077: 
                   2078:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   2079:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   2080:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   2081:       {
                   2082:        if (i == 0)
                   2083:          {
                   2084:            x = XEXP (x, 0);
                   2085:            goto repeat;
                   2086:          }
                   2087:        else
                   2088:          if (refers_to_p (XEXP (x, i), y))
                   2089:            return 1;
                   2090:       }
                   2091:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   2092:       {
                   2093:        int j;
                   2094:        for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   2095:          if (refers_to_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), y))
                   2096:            return 1;
                   2097:       }
                   2098: 
                   2099:   return 0;
                   2100: }
                   2101: 
                   2102: /* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X refers to memory
                   2103:    at an address of BASE plus some offset
                   2104:    such that any of the bytes' offsets fall between START (inclusive)
                   2105:    and END (exclusive).
                   2106: 
                   2107:    The value is undefined if X is a varying address.
                   2108:    This function is not used in such cases.
                   2109: 
                   2110:    When used in the cse pass, `qty_const' is nonzero, and it is used
                   2111:    to treat an address that is a register with a known constant value
                   2112:    as if it were that constant value.
                   2113:    In the loop pass, `qty_const' is zero, so this is not done.  */
                   2114: 
                   2115: int
                   2116: refers_to_mem_p (x, base, start, end)
                   2117:      rtx x, base;
                   2118:      int start, end;
                   2119: {
                   2120:   register int i;
                   2121:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   2122:   register char *fmt;
                   2123: 
                   2124:   if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST_INT)
                   2125:     {
                   2126:       start += INTVAL (base);
                   2127:       end += INTVAL (base);
                   2128:       base = const0_rtx;
                   2129:     }
                   2130: 
                   2131:  repeat:
                   2132:   if (x == 0)
                   2133:     return 0;
                   2134: 
                   2135:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   2136:   if (code == MEM)
                   2137:     {
                   2138:       register rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0); /* Get the address.  */
                   2139:       int myend;
                   2140: 
                   2141:       i = 0;
                   2142:       if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
                   2143:          /* qty_const is 0 when outside the cse pass;
                   2144:             at such times, this info is not available.  */
                   2145:          && qty_const != 0
                   2146:          && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
                   2147:          && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
                   2148:          && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
                   2149:        addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
                   2150:       else if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
                   2151:               && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
                   2152:               && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
                   2153:               && qty_const != 0
                   2154:               && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)))
                   2155:               && (GET_MODE (XEXP (addr, 0))
                   2156:                   == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
                   2157:               && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
                   2158:        {
                   2159:          i = INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
                   2160:          addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]];
                   2161:        }
                   2162: 
                   2163:     check_addr:
                   2164:       if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST)
                   2165:        addr = XEXP (addr, 0);
                   2166: 
                   2167:       /* If ADDR is BASE, or BASE plus an integer, put
                   2168:         the integer in I.  */
                   2169:       if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
                   2170:          && XEXP (addr, 0) == base
                   2171:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   2172:        i += INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
                   2173:       else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
                   2174:        {
                   2175:          if (GET_CODE (base) != LO_SUM)
                   2176:            return 1;
                   2177:          /* The REG component of the LO_SUM is known by the
                   2178:             const value in the XEXP part.  */
                   2179:          addr = XEXP (addr, 1);
                   2180:          base = XEXP (base, 1);
                   2181:          i = 0;
                   2182:          if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
                   2183:            base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   2184:          if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
                   2185:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   2186:            {
                   2187:              int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
                   2188:              start += tem;
                   2189:              end += tem;
                   2190:              base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   2191:            }
                   2192:          goto check_addr;
                   2193:        }
                   2194:       else if (GET_CODE (base) == LO_SUM)
                   2195:        {
                   2196:          base = XEXP (base, 1);
                   2197:          if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
                   2198:            base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   2199:          if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
                   2200:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   2201:            {
                   2202:              int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
                   2203:              start += tem;
                   2204:              end += tem;
                   2205:              base = XEXP (base, 0);
                   2206:            }
                   2207:          goto check_addr;        
                   2208:        }
                   2209:       else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST_INT && base == const0_rtx)
                   2210:        i = INTVAL (addr);
                   2211:       else if (addr != base)
                   2212:        return 0;
                   2213: 
                   2214:       myend = i + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
                   2215:       return myend > start && i < end;
                   2216:     }
                   2217: 
                   2218:   /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions.  */
                   2219: 
                   2220:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   2221:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   2222:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   2223:       {
                   2224:        if (i == 0)
                   2225:          {
                   2226:            x = XEXP (x, 0);
                   2227:            goto repeat;
                   2228:          }
                   2229:        else
                   2230:          if (refers_to_mem_p (XEXP (x, i), base, start, end))
                   2231:            return 1;
                   2232:       }
                   2233:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   2234:       {
                   2235:        int j;
                   2236:        for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   2237:          if (refers_to_mem_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), base, start, end))
                   2238:            return 1;
                   2239:       }
                   2240: 
                   2241:   return 0;
                   2242: }
                   2243: 
                   2244: /* Nonzero if X refers to memory at a varying address;
                   2245:    except that a register which has at the moment a known constant value
                   2246:    isn't considered variable.  */
                   2247: 
                   2248: static int
                   2249: cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (x)
                   2250:      rtx x;
                   2251: {
                   2252:   /* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
                   2253:      mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
                   2254:      doesn't vary in any mode.  */
                   2255: 
                   2256:   if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
                   2257:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
                   2258:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
                   2259:       && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]]
                   2260:       && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]] != 0)
                   2261:     return 0;
                   2262: 
                   2263:   if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
                   2264:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
                   2265:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
                   2266:       && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG
                   2267:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
                   2268:       && (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
                   2269:          == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
                   2270:       && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
                   2271:     return 0;
                   2272: 
                   2273:   return rtx_addr_varies_p (x);
                   2274: }
                   2275: 
                   2276: /* Canonicalize an expression:
                   2277:    replace each register reference inside it
                   2278:    with the "oldest" equivalent register.
                   2279: 
                   2280:    If INSN is non-zero and we are replacing a pseudo with a hard register
                   2281:    or vice versa, verify that INSN remains valid after we make our
                   2282:    substitution.  */
                   2283: 
                   2284: static rtx
                   2285: canon_reg (x, insn)
                   2286:      rtx x;
                   2287:      rtx insn;
                   2288: {
                   2289:   register int i;
                   2290:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   2291:   register char *fmt;
                   2292: 
                   2293:   if (x == 0)
                   2294:     return x;
                   2295: 
                   2296:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   2297:   switch (code)
                   2298:     {
                   2299:     case PC:
                   2300:     case CC0:
                   2301:     case CONST:
                   2302:     case CONST_INT:
                   2303:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   2304:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   2305:     case LABEL_REF:
                   2306:     case ADDR_VEC:
                   2307:     case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
                   2308:       return x;
                   2309: 
                   2310:     case REG:
                   2311:       {
                   2312:        register int first;
                   2313: 
                   2314:        /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
                   2315:           in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
                   2316:           of each occurrence.  Also, some hard regs appear in
                   2317:           MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered.  Don't try to
                   2318:           replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS.  */
                   2319:        if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   2320:            || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
                   2321:          return x;
                   2322: 
                   2323:        first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]];
                   2324:        return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
                   2325:                : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
                   2326:                : gen_rtx (REG, qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]], first));
                   2327:       }
                   2328:     }
                   2329: 
                   2330:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   2331:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   2332:     {
                   2333:       register int j;
                   2334: 
                   2335:       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   2336:        {
                   2337:          rtx new = canon_reg (XEXP (x, i), insn);
                   2338: 
                   2339:          /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
                   2340:             insn remains valid.  */
                   2341:          if (new && GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == REG
                   2342:              && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2343:                  != (REGNO (XEXP (x, i)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
                   2344:            validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), new, 0);
                   2345:          else
                   2346:            XEXP (x, i) = new;
                   2347:        }
                   2348:       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   2349:        for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
                   2350:          XVECEXP (x, i, j) = canon_reg (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
                   2351:     }
                   2352: 
                   2353:   return x;
                   2354: }
                   2355: 
                   2356: /* LOC is a location with INSN that is an operand address (the contents of
                   2357:    a MEM).  Find the best equivalent address to use that is valid for this
                   2358:    insn.
                   2359: 
                   2360:    On most CISC machines, complicated address modes are costly, and rtx_cost
                   2361:    is a good approximation for that cost.  However, most RISC machines have
                   2362:    only a few (usually only one) memory reference formats.  If an address is
                   2363:    valid at all, it is often just as cheap as any other address.  Hence, for
                   2364:    RISC machines, we use the configuration macro `ADDRESS_COST' to compare the
                   2365:    costs of various addresses.  For two addresses of equal cost, choose the one
                   2366:    with the highest `rtx_cost' value as that has the potential of eliminating
                   2367:    the most insns.  For equal costs, we choose the first in the equivalence
                   2368:    class.  Note that we ignore the fact that pseudo registers are cheaper
                   2369:    than hard registers here because we would also prefer the pseudo registers.
                   2370:   */
                   2371: 
                   2372: void
                   2373: find_best_addr (insn, loc)
                   2374:      rtx insn;
                   2375:      rtx *loc;
                   2376: {
                   2377:   struct table_elt *elt, *p;
                   2378:   rtx addr = *loc;
                   2379:   int our_cost;
                   2380:   int found_better = 1;
                   2381:   int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
                   2382:   int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   2383:   int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   2384:   int hash_code;
                   2385:   int addr_volatile;
                   2386:   int regno;
                   2387: 
                   2388:   /* Do not try to replace constant addresses or addresses of local and
                   2389:      argument slots.  These MEM expressions are made only once and inserted
                   2390:      in many instructions, as well as being used to control symbol table
                   2391:      output.  It is not safe to clobber them.
                   2392: 
                   2393:      There are some uncommon cases where the address is already in a register
                   2394:      for some reason, but we cannot take advantage of that because we have
                   2395:      no easy way to unshare the MEM.  In addition, looking up all stack
                   2396:      addresses is costly.  */
                   2397:   if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
                   2398:        && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
                   2399:        && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
                   2400:        && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)),
                   2401:           regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
                   2402:       || (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
                   2403:          && (regno = REGNO (addr),
                   2404:              regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
                   2405:       || CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr))
                   2406:     return;
                   2407: 
                   2408:   /* If this address is not simply a register, try to fold it.  This will
                   2409:      sometimes simplify the expression.  Many simplifications
                   2410:      will not be valid, but some, usually applying the associative rule, will
                   2411:      be valid and produce better code.  */
                   2412:   if (GET_CODE (addr) != REG
                   2413:       && validate_change (insn, loc, fold_rtx (addr, insn), 0))
                   2414:     addr = *loc;
                   2415:        
                   2416:   /* If this address is not in the hash table, we can't do any better.
                   2417:      Also, ignore if volatile.  */
                   2418:   do_not_record = 0;
                   2419:   hash_code = HASH (addr, Pmode);
                   2420:   addr_volatile = do_not_record;
                   2421:   do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
                   2422:   hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
                   2423:   hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
                   2424: 
                   2425:   if (addr_volatile)
                   2426:     return;
                   2427: 
                   2428:   elt = lookup (addr, hash_code, Pmode);
                   2429: 
                   2430:   if (elt == 0)
                   2431:     return;
                   2432: 
                   2433: #ifndef ADDRESS_COST
                   2434:   our_cost = elt->cost;
                   2435: 
                   2436:   /* Find the lowest cost below ours that works.  */
                   2437:   for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
                   2438:     if (elt->cost < our_cost
                   2439:        && (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
                   2440:        && validate_change (insn, loc, canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), 0), 0))
                   2441:       return;
                   2442: 
                   2443: #else
                   2444: 
                   2445:   /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry in
                   2446:      the class that is valid.  We use the `flag' field to indicate choices
                   2447:      that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better one that
                   2448:      hasn't already been tried.  */
                   2449: 
                   2450:   for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   2451:     p->flag = 0;
                   2452: 
                   2453:   while (found_better)
                   2454:     {
                   2455:       int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
                   2456:       int best_rtx_cost = (elt->cost + 1) >> 1;
                   2457:       struct table_elt *best_elt = elt; 
                   2458: 
                   2459:       found_better = 0;
                   2460:       for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   2461:        if (! p->flag
                   2462:            && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
                   2463:            && (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) < best_addr_cost
                   2464:                || (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) == best_addr_cost
                   2465:                    && (p->cost + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
                   2466:          {
                   2467:            found_better = 1;
                   2468:            best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (p->exp);
                   2469:            best_rtx_cost = (p->cost + 1) >> 1;
                   2470:            best_elt = p;
                   2471:          }
                   2472: 
                   2473:       if (found_better)
                   2474:        {
                   2475:          if (validate_change (insn, loc,
                   2476:                               canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_elt->exp), 0), 0))
                   2477:            return;
                   2478:          else
                   2479:            best_elt->flag = 1;
                   2480:        }
                   2481:     }
                   2482: #endif
                   2483: }
                   2484: 
                   2485: /* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
                   2486:    operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
                   2487:    what values are being compared.
                   2488: 
                   2489:    *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
                   2490:    actually being compared.  For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
                   2491:    was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
                   2492:    compared to produce cc0.
                   2493: 
                   2494:    The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
                   2495:    A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison.  */
                   2496: 
                   2497: static enum rtx_code
                   2498: find_comparison_args (code, parg1, parg2)
                   2499:      enum rtx_code code;
                   2500:      rtx *parg1, *parg2;
                   2501: {
                   2502:   rtx arg1, arg2;
                   2503: 
                   2504:   arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
                   2505: 
                   2506:   /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to.  */
                   2507: 
                   2508:   while (arg2 == const0_rtx)
                   2509:     {
                   2510:       /* Set non-zero when we find something of interest.  */
                   2511:       rtx x = 0;
                   2512:       int reverse_code = 0;
                   2513:       struct table_elt *p = 0;
                   2514: 
                   2515:       /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
                   2516:         On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
                   2517:         fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
                   2518:         when given CC0.  */
                   2519: 
                   2520:       if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
                   2521:        x = arg1;
                   2522: 
                   2523:       /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
                   2524:         STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments.  */
                   2525: 
                   2526:       else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (arg1)) == '<')
                   2527:        {
                   2528:          if (code == NE || (code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1))
                   2529:            x = arg1;
                   2530:          else if (code == EQ || (code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1))
                   2531:            x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
                   2532:        }
                   2533: 
                   2534:       /* ??? We could also check for
                   2535: 
                   2536:         (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
                   2537: 
                   2538:         and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring.  */
                   2539: 
                   2540:       if (x == 0)
                   2541:        /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
                   2542:           that lets us see what is being compared.  */
                   2543:        p = lookup (arg1, safe_hash (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)) % NBUCKETS,
                   2544:                    GET_MODE (arg1));
                   2545:       if (p) p = p->first_same_value;
                   2546: 
                   2547:       for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   2548:        {
                   2549:          enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
                   2550: 
                   2551:          /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it.  */
                   2552:          if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
                   2553:            continue;
                   2554: 
                   2555:          if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
                   2556:              /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
                   2557:                 that includes the comparison code.  In that case, ARG1 would
                   2558:                 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
                   2559:                 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero.  If this is an NE operation,
                   2560:                 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
                   2561:                 we must reverse ORIG_CODE.  On machine with a negative value
                   2562:                 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations.  */
                   2563:              || ((code == NE
                   2564:                   || (code == LT
                   2565:                       && inner_mode != VOIDmode
                   2566:                       && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   2567:                       && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
                   2568:                           & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1)))))
                   2569:                  && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<'))
                   2570:            {
                   2571:              x = p->exp;
                   2572:              break;
                   2573:            }
                   2574:          else if ((code == EQ
                   2575:                    || (code == GE
                   2576:                        && inner_mode != VOIDmode
                   2577:                        && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   2578:                        && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
                   2579:                            & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1)))))
                   2580:                   && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<')
                   2581:            {
                   2582:              reverse_code = 1;
                   2583:              x = p->exp;
                   2584:              break;
                   2585:            }
                   2586: 
                   2587:          /* If this is fp + constant, the equivalent is a better operand since
                   2588:             it may let us predict the value of the comparison.  */
                   2589:          else if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (p->exp))
                   2590:            {
                   2591:              arg1 = p->exp;
                   2592:              continue;
                   2593:            }
                   2594:        }
                   2595: 
                   2596:       /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
                   2597:         Otherwise, set up for the next iteration.  */
                   2598:       if (x == 0)
                   2599:        break;
                   2600: 
                   2601:       arg1 = XEXP (x, 0),  arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
                   2602:       if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<')
                   2603:        code = GET_CODE (x);
                   2604: 
                   2605:       if (reverse_code)
                   2606:        code = reverse_condition (code);
                   2607:     }
                   2608: 
                   2609:   /* Return our results.  */
                   2610:   *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
                   2611: 
                   2612:   return code;
                   2613: }
                   2614: 
                   2615: /* Try to simplify a unary operation CODE whose output mode is to be
                   2616:    MODE with input operand OP whose mode was originally OP_MODE.
                   2617:    Return zero if no simplification can be made.  */
                   2618: 
                   2619: rtx
                   2620: simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op, op_mode)
                   2621:      enum rtx_code code;
                   2622:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   2623:      rtx op;
                   2624:      enum machine_mode op_mode;
                   2625: {
                   2626:   register int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   2627: 
                   2628:   /* The order of these tests is critical so that, for example, we don't
                   2629:      check the wrong mode (input vs. output) for a conversion operation,
                   2630:      such as FIX.  At some point, this should be simplified.  */
                   2631: 
                   2632: #if !defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   2633:   if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
                   2634:     {
                   2635:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2636: 
                   2637: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   2638:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), INTVAL (op) < 0 ? ~0 : 0);
                   2639: #else
                   2640:       d = (double) INTVAL (op);
                   2641: #endif
                   2642:       return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
                   2643:     }
                   2644:   else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
                   2645:     {
                   2646:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2647: 
                   2648: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   2649:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), 0);
                   2650: #else
                   2651:       d = (double) (unsigned int) INTVAL (op);
                   2652: #endif
                   2653:       return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
                   2654:     }
                   2655: 
                   2656:   else if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   2657:           && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
                   2658:     {
                   2659:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2660: 
                   2661: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   2662:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
                   2663: #else
                   2664:       if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) < 0)
                   2665:        {
                   2666:          d = (double) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
                   2667:          d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
                   2668:                * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
                   2669:          d += (double) (unsigned) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op));
                   2670:          d = (- d - 1.0);
                   2671:        }
                   2672:       else
                   2673:        {
                   2674:          d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
                   2675:          d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
                   2676:                * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
                   2677:          d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
                   2678:        }
                   2679: #endif  /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
                   2680:       return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
                   2681:     }
                   2682:   else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   2683:           && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
                   2684:     {
                   2685:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2686: 
                   2687: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   2688:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_UNSIGNED_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op),
                   2689:                                    CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
                   2690: #else
                   2691:       d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
                   2692:       d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
                   2693:            * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
                   2694:       d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
                   2695: #endif  /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
                   2696:       return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
                   2697:     }
                   2698: #endif
                   2699: 
                   2700:   else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
                   2701:           && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
                   2702:     {
                   2703:       register int arg0 = INTVAL (op);
                   2704:       register int val;
                   2705: 
                   2706:       switch (code)
                   2707:        {
                   2708:        case NOT:
                   2709:          val = ~ arg0;
                   2710:          break;
                   2711: 
                   2712:        case NEG:
                   2713:          val = - arg0;
                   2714:          break;
                   2715: 
                   2716:        case ABS:
                   2717:          val = (arg0 >= 0 ? arg0 : - arg0);
                   2718:          break;
                   2719: 
                   2720:        case FFS:
                   2721:          /* Don't use ffs here.  Instead, get low order bit and then its
                   2722:             number.  If arg0 is zero, this will return 0, as desired.  */
                   2723:          arg0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
                   2724:          val = exact_log2 (arg0 & (- arg0)) + 1;
                   2725:          break;
                   2726: 
                   2727:        case TRUNCATE:
                   2728:          val = arg0;
                   2729:          break;
                   2730: 
                   2731:        case ZERO_EXTEND:
                   2732:          if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
                   2733:            op_mode = mode;
                   2734:          if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2735:            val = arg0;
                   2736:          else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2737:            val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
                   2738:          else
                   2739:            return 0;
                   2740:          break;
                   2741: 
                   2742:        case SIGN_EXTEND:
                   2743:          if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
                   2744:            op_mode = mode;
                   2745:          if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2746:            val = arg0;
                   2747:          else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2748:            {
                   2749:              val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
                   2750:              if (val & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1)))
                   2751:                val -= 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
                   2752:            }
                   2753:          else
                   2754:            return 0;
                   2755:          break;
                   2756: 
                   2757:        default:
                   2758:          abort ();
                   2759:        }
                   2760: 
                   2761:       /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
                   2762:         unless they and our sign bit are all one.
                   2763:         So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
                   2764:         unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   2765:       if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   2766:          && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   2767:        val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   2768: 
                   2769:       return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   2770:     }
                   2771: 
                   2772:   /* We can do some operations on integer CONST_DOUBLEs.  Also allow
                   2773:      for a DImode operation on a CONST_INT. */
                   2774:   else if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode
                   2775:           && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
                   2776:     {
                   2777:       int l1, h1, lv, hv;
                   2778: 
                   2779:       if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
                   2780:        l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
                   2781:       else
                   2782:        l1 = INTVAL (op), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
                   2783: 
                   2784:       switch (code)
                   2785:        {
                   2786:        case NOT:
                   2787:          lv = ~ l1;
                   2788:          hv = ~ h1;
                   2789:          break;
                   2790: 
                   2791:        case NEG:
                   2792:          neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
                   2793:          break;
                   2794: 
                   2795:        case ABS:
                   2796:          if (h1 < 0)
                   2797:            neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
                   2798:          else
                   2799:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   2800:          break;
                   2801: 
                   2802:        case FFS:
                   2803:          hv = 0;
                   2804:          if (l1 == 0)
                   2805:            lv = HOST_BITS_PER_INT + exact_log2 (h1 & (-h1)) + 1;
                   2806:          else
                   2807:            lv = exact_log2 (l1 & (-l1)) + 1;
                   2808:          break;
                   2809: 
                   2810:        case TRUNCATE:
                   2811:          if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2812:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
                   2813:          else
                   2814:            return 0;
                   2815:          break;
                   2816: 
                   2817:        default:
                   2818:          return 0;
                   2819:        }
                   2820: 
                   2821:       return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
                   2822:     }
                   2823: 
                   2824: #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   2825:   else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   2826:           && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   2827:     {
                   2828:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2829:       jmp_buf handler;
                   2830:       rtx x;
                   2831: 
                   2832:       if (setjmp (handler))
                   2833:        /* There used to be a warning here, but that is inadvisable.
                   2834:           People may want to cause traps, and the natural way
                   2835:           to do it should not get a warning.  */
                   2836:        return 0;
                   2837: 
                   2838:       set_float_handler (handler);
                   2839: 
                   2840:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
                   2841: 
                   2842:       switch (code)
                   2843:        {
                   2844:        case NEG:
                   2845:          d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
                   2846:          break;
                   2847: 
                   2848:        case ABS:
                   2849:          if (REAL_VALUES_LESS (d, 0.0))
                   2850:            d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
                   2851:          break;
                   2852: 
                   2853:        case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
                   2854:          d = (double) REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, d);
                   2855:          break;
                   2856: 
                   2857:        case FLOAT_EXTEND:
                   2858:          /* All this does is change the mode.  */
                   2859:          break;
                   2860: 
                   2861:        case FIX:
                   2862:          d = (double) REAL_VALUE_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
                   2863:          break;
                   2864: 
                   2865:        case UNSIGNED_FIX:
                   2866:          d = (double) REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
                   2867:          break;
                   2868: 
                   2869:        default:
                   2870:          abort ();
                   2871:        }
                   2872: 
                   2873:       x = immed_real_const_1 (d, mode);
                   2874:       set_float_handler (0);
                   2875:       return x;
                   2876:     }
                   2877:   else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   2878:           && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
                   2879:     {
                   2880:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   2881:       jmp_buf handler;
                   2882:       rtx x;
                   2883:       int val;
                   2884: 
                   2885:       if (setjmp (handler))
                   2886:        return 0;
                   2887: 
                   2888:       set_float_handler (handler);
                   2889: 
                   2890:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
                   2891: 
                   2892:       switch (code)
                   2893:        {
                   2894:        case FIX:
                   2895:          val = REAL_VALUE_FIX (d);
                   2896:          break;
                   2897: 
                   2898:        case UNSIGNED_FIX:
                   2899:          val = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (d);
                   2900:          break;
                   2901: 
                   2902:        default:
                   2903:          abort ();
                   2904:        }
                   2905: 
                   2906:       set_float_handler (0);
                   2907: 
                   2908:       /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
                   2909:         unless they and our sign bit are all one.
                   2910:         So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
                   2911:         unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   2912:       if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   2913:          && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   2914:        val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   2915: 
                   2916:       return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   2917:     }
                   2918: #endif
                   2919:   else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   2920:           || TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT)
                   2921:     {
                   2922:       /* There are some simplifications we can do even if the operands
                   2923:         aren't constant, but they don't apply to floating-point
                   2924:         unless not IEEE.  */
                   2925:       switch (code)
                   2926:        {
                   2927:        case NEG:
                   2928:        case NOT:
                   2929:          /* (not (not X)) == X, similarly for NEG.  */
                   2930:          if (GET_CODE (op) == code)
                   2931:            return XEXP (op, 0);
                   2932:          break;
                   2933: 
                   2934:        case SIGN_EXTEND:
                   2935:          /* (sign_extend (truncate (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2))))
                   2936:             becomes just the MINUS if its mode is MODE.  This allows
                   2937:             folding switch statements on machines using casesi (such as
                   2938:             the Vax).  */
                   2939:          if (GET_CODE (op) == TRUNCATE
                   2940:              && GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == mode
                   2941:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS
                   2942:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
                   2943:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
                   2944:            return XEXP (op, 0);
                   2945:          break;
                   2946:        }
                   2947: 
                   2948:       return 0;
                   2949:     }
                   2950:   else
                   2951:     return 0;
                   2952: }
                   2953: 
                   2954: /* Simplify a binary operation CODE with result mode MODE, operating on OP0
                   2955:    and OP1.  Return 0 if no simplification is possible.
                   2956: 
                   2957:    Don't use this for relational operations such as EQ or LT.
                   2958:    Use simplify_relational_operation instead.  */
                   2959: 
                   2960: rtx
                   2961: simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
                   2962:      enum rtx_code code;
                   2963:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   2964:      rtx op0, op1;
                   2965: {
                   2966:   register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
                   2967:   int val;
                   2968:   int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   2969: 
                   2970:   /* Relational operations don't work here.  We must know the mode
                   2971:      of the operands in order to do the comparison correctly.
                   2972:      Assuming a full word can give incorrect results.
                   2973:      Consider comparing 128 with -128 in QImode.  */
                   2974: 
                   2975:   if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
                   2976:     abort ();
                   2977: 
                   2978: #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   2979:   if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
                   2980:       && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   2981:       && mode == GET_MODE (op0) && mode == GET_MODE (op1))
                   2982:     {
                   2983:       REAL_VALUE_TYPE f0, f1, value;
                   2984:       jmp_buf handler;
                   2985: 
                   2986:       if (setjmp (handler))
                   2987:        return 0;
                   2988: 
                   2989:       set_float_handler (handler);
                   2990: 
                   2991:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f0, op0);
                   2992:       REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f1, op1);
                   2993:       f0 = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, f0);
                   2994:       f1 = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, f1);
                   2995: 
                   2996: #ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
                   2997:       REAL_ARITHMETIC (value, code, f0, f1);
                   2998: #else
                   2999:       switch (code)
                   3000:        {
                   3001:        case PLUS:
                   3002:          value = f0 + f1;
                   3003:          break;
                   3004:        case MINUS:
                   3005:          value = f0 - f1;
                   3006:          break;
                   3007:        case MULT:
                   3008:          value = f0 * f1;
                   3009:          break;
                   3010:        case DIV:
                   3011: #ifndef REAL_INFINITY
                   3012:          if (f1 == 0)
                   3013:            abort ();
                   3014: #endif
                   3015:          value = f0 / f1;
                   3016:          break;
                   3017:        case SMIN:
                   3018:          value = MIN (f0, f1);
                   3019:          break;
                   3020:        case SMAX:
                   3021:          value = MAX (f0, f1);
                   3022:          break;
                   3023:        default:
                   3024:          abort ();
                   3025:        }
                   3026: #endif
                   3027: 
                   3028:       set_float_handler (0);
                   3029:       value = REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (mode, value);
                   3030:       return immed_real_const_1 (value, mode);
                   3031:     }
                   3032: 
                   3033:   /* We can fold some multi-word operations.  */
                   3034:   else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   3035:           && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3036:           && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
                   3037:     {
                   3038:       int l1, l2, h1, h2, lv, hv;
                   3039: 
                   3040:       l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
                   3041: 
                   3042:       if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
                   3043:        l2 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
                   3044:       else
                   3045:        l2 = INTVAL (op1), h2 = l2 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
                   3046: 
                   3047:       switch (code)
                   3048:        {
                   3049:        case MINUS:
                   3050:          /* A - B == A + (-B).  */
                   3051:          neg_double (l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
                   3052:          l2 = lv, h2 = hv;
                   3053: 
                   3054:          /* .. fall through ... */
                   3055: 
                   3056:        case PLUS:
                   3057:          add_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
                   3058:          break;
                   3059: 
                   3060:        case MULT:
                   3061:          mul_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
                   3062:          break;
                   3063: 
                   3064:        case DIV:  case MOD:   case UDIV:  case UMOD:
                   3065:          /* We'd need to include tree.h to do this and it doesn't seem worth
                   3066:             it.  */
                   3067:          return 0;
                   3068: 
                   3069:        case AND:
                   3070:          lv = l1 & l2, hv = h1 & h2;
                   3071:          break;
                   3072: 
                   3073:        case IOR:
                   3074:          lv = l1 | l2, hv = h1 | h2;
                   3075:          break;
                   3076: 
                   3077:        case XOR:
                   3078:          lv = l1 ^ l2, hv = h1 ^ h2;
                   3079:          break;
                   3080: 
                   3081:        case SMIN:
                   3082:          if (h1 < h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
                   3083:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   3084:          else
                   3085:            lv = l2, hv = h2;
                   3086:          break;
                   3087: 
                   3088:        case SMAX:
                   3089:          if (h1 > h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
                   3090:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   3091:          else
                   3092:            lv = l2, hv = h2;
                   3093:          break;
                   3094: 
                   3095:        case UMIN:
                   3096:          if ((unsigned) h1 < (unsigned) h2
                   3097:              || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
                   3098:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   3099:          else
                   3100:            lv = l2, hv = h2;
                   3101:          break;
                   3102: 
                   3103:        case UMAX:
                   3104:          if ((unsigned) h1 > (unsigned) h2
                   3105:              || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
                   3106:            lv = l1, hv = h1;
                   3107:          else
                   3108:            lv = l2, hv = h2;
                   3109:          break;
                   3110: 
                   3111:        case LSHIFTRT:   case ASHIFTRT:
                   3112:        case ASHIFT:     case LSHIFT:
                   3113:        case ROTATE:     case ROTATERT:
                   3114: #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   3115:          l2 &= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), h2 = 0;
                   3116: #endif
                   3117: 
                   3118:          if (h2 != 0 || l2 < 0 || l2 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
                   3119:            return 0;
                   3120: 
                   3121:          if (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
                   3122:            rshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
                   3123:                           code == ASHIFTRT);
                   3124:          else if (code == ASHIFT || code == LSHIFT)
                   3125:            lshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
                   3126:                           code == ASHIFT);
                   3127:          else if (code == ROTATE)
                   3128:            lrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
                   3129:          else /* code == ROTATERT */
                   3130:            rrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
                   3131:          break;
                   3132: 
                   3133:        default:
                   3134:          return 0;
                   3135:        }
                   3136: 
                   3137:       return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
                   3138:     }
                   3139: #endif  /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
                   3140: 
                   3141:   if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
                   3142:       || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
                   3143:     {
                   3144:       /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
                   3145:         there are some cases worth simplifying.  */
                   3146: 
                   3147:       switch (code)
                   3148:        {
                   3149:        case PLUS:
                   3150:          /* In IEEE floating point, x+0 is not the same as x.  Similarly
                   3151:             for the other optimizations below.  */
                   3152:          if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3153:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   3154:            break;
                   3155: 
                   3156:          if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3157:            return op0;
                   3158: 
                   3159:          /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs.  They don't matter in any of 
                   3160:             the cases below.  */
                   3161:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
                   3162:            op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3163:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
                   3164:            op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
                   3165: 
                   3166:          /* ((-a) + b) -> (b - a) and similarly for (a + (-b)) */
                   3167:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG)
                   3168:            {
                   3169:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
                   3170:                                                   op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
                   3171:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
                   3172:            }
                   3173:          else if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
                   3174:            {
                   3175:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
                   3176:                                                   op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3177:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3178:            }
                   3179: 
                   3180:          /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
                   3181:             The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
                   3182:             and subtle programs can break if operations are associated.  */
                   3183:          if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   3184:            break;
                   3185: 
                   3186:          /* (a - b) + b -> a, similarly a + (b - a) -> a */
                   3187:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
                   3188:              && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3189:            return XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3190: 
                   3191:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
                   3192:              && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3193:            return XEXP (op1, 0);
                   3194: 
                   3195:          /* (c1 - a) + c2 becomes (c1 + c2) - a.  */
                   3196:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
                   3197:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == CONST_INT)
                   3198:            {
                   3199:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, op1,
                   3200:                                                   XEXP (op0, 0));
                   3201: 
                   3202:              return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op0, 1)) : 0;
                   3203:            }
                   3204: 
                   3205:          /* Handle both-operands-constant cases.  */
                   3206:          if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && CONSTANT_P (op1)
                   3207:              && GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_DOUBLE
                   3208:              && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
                   3209:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3210:            {
                   3211:              if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
                   3212:                return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
                   3213:              else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
                   3214:                return plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (op0));
                   3215:              else
                   3216:                return gen_rtx (CONST, mode,
                   3217:                                gen_rtx (PLUS, mode,
                   3218:                                         GET_CODE (op0) == CONST
                   3219:                                         ? XEXP (op0, 0) : op0,
                   3220:                                         GET_CODE (op1) == CONST
                   3221:                                         ? XEXP (op1, 0) : op1));
                   3222:            }
                   3223:          else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3224:                   && GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3225:                   && (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
                   3226:                       || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))))
                   3227:            /* constant + (variable + constant)
                   3228:               can result if an index register is made constant.
                   3229:               We simplify this by adding the constants.
                   3230:               If we did not, it would become an invalid address.  */
                   3231:            return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
                   3232:          break;
                   3233: 
                   3234:        case COMPARE:
                   3235: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   3236:          /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't
                   3237:             using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE
                   3238:             so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy.
                   3239: 
                   3240:             In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x.  */
                   3241: 
                   3242:          if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3243:               || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3244:              && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3245:            return op0;
                   3246: #else
                   3247:          /* Do nothing here.  */
                   3248: #endif
                   3249:          break;
                   3250:              
                   3251:        case MINUS:
                   3252:          /* In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x.  */
                   3253:          if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
                   3254:              && ! side_effects_p (op0)
                   3255:              /* We can't assume x-x is 0
                   3256:                 even with non-IEEE floating point.  */
                   3257:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_FLOAT)
                   3258:            return const0_rtx;
                   3259: 
                   3260:          /* Change subtraction from zero into negation.  */
                   3261:          if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3262:            return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op1);
                   3263: 
                   3264:          /* The remainer of these cases cannot be done for IEEE
                   3265:             floating-point.  */
                   3266:          if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3267:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   3268:            break;
                   3269: 
                   3270:          /* Subtracting 0 has no effect.  */
                   3271:          if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3272:            return op0;
                   3273: 
                   3274:          /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs.  They don't matter in any of 
                   3275:             the cases below.  */
                   3276:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
                   3277:            op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3278:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
                   3279:            op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
                   3280: 
                   3281:          /* (a - (-b)) -> (a + b).  */
                   3282:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
                   3283:            {
                   3284:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode,
                   3285:                                                   op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3286:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3287:            }
                   3288: 
                   3289:          /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
                   3290:             The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
                   3291:             and subtle programs can break if operations are associated.  */
                   3292:          if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   3293:            break;
                   3294: 
                   3295:          /* (a + b) - a -> b, and (b - (a + b))  -> -a  */
                   3296:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3297:              && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1)
                   3298:              && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3299:            return XEXP (op0, 1);
                   3300:          else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3301:                   && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1)
                   3302:                   && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3303:            return XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3304: 
                   3305:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
                   3306:              && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)
                   3307:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3308:            {
                   3309:              rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1),
                   3310:                                                  mode);
                   3311: 
                   3312:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1));
                   3313:            }
                   3314:          else if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
                   3315:                   && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0)
                   3316:                   && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3317:            {
                   3318:              rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0),
                   3319:                                                  mode);
                   3320: 
                   3321:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3322:            }
                   3323: 
                   3324:          /* a - (a - b) -> b */
                   3325:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS && rtx_equal_p (op0, XEXP (op1, 0))
                   3326:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3327:            return XEXP (op1, 1);
                   3328: 
                   3329:          /* (a +/- b) - (a +/- c) can be simplified.  Do variants of
                   3330:             this involving commutativity.  The most common case is
                   3331:             (a + C1) - (a + C2), but it's not hard to do all the cases.  */
                   3332:          if ((GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS)
                   3333:              && (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS))
                   3334:            {
                   3335:              rtx lhs0 = XEXP (op0, 0), lhs1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
                   3336:              rtx rhs0 = XEXP (op1, 0), rhs1 = XEXP (op1, 1);
                   3337:              int lhs_neg = GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS;
                   3338:              int rhs_neg = GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS;
                   3339:              rtx lhs = 0, rhs = 0;
                   3340: 
                   3341:              /* Set LHS and RHS to the two different terms.  */
                   3342:              if (rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs0) && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
                   3343:                lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs1;
                   3344:              else if (! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs1)
                   3345:                       && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
                   3346:                lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs0;
                   3347:              else if (! lhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs0)
                   3348:                       && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
                   3349:                lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs1;
                   3350:              else if (! lhs_neg && ! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs1)
                   3351:                       && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
                   3352:                lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs0;
                   3353: 
                   3354:              /* The RHS is the operand of a MINUS, so its negation
                   3355:                 status should be complemented.  */
                   3356:              rhs_neg = ! rhs_neg;
                   3357: 
                   3358:              /* If we found two values equal, form the sum or difference
                   3359:                 of the remaining two terms.   */
                   3360:              if (lhs)
                   3361:                {
                   3362:                  rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
                   3363:                                                       ? PLUS : MINUS,
                   3364:                                                       mode,
                   3365:                                                       lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
                   3366:                                                       lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
                   3367:                  if (tem == 0)
                   3368:                    tem = gen_rtx (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
                   3369:                                   ? PLUS : MINUS,
                   3370:                                   mode, lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
                   3371:                                   lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
                   3372: 
                   3373:                  /* If both sides negated, negate result.  */
                   3374:                  if (lhs_neg && rhs_neg)
                   3375:                    {
                   3376:                      rtx tem1
                   3377:                        = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, tem, mode);
                   3378:                      if (tem1 == 0)
                   3379:                        tem1 = gen_rtx (NEG, mode, tem);
                   3380:                      tem = tem1;
                   3381:                    }
                   3382: 
                   3383:                  return tem;
                   3384:                }
                   3385: 
                   3386:              return 0;
                   3387:            }
                   3388: 
                   3389:          /* c1 - (a + c2) becomes (c1 - c2) - a.  */
                   3390:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
                   3391:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   3392:            {
                   3393:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
                   3394:                                                   XEXP (op1, 1));
                   3395: 
                   3396:              return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op1, 0)) : 0;
                   3397:            }
                   3398: 
                   3399:          /* c1 - (c2 - a) becomes (c1 - c2) + a.  */
                   3400:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
                   3401:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == CONST_INT)
                   3402:            {
                   3403:              rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
                   3404:                                                   XEXP (op1, 0));
                   3405: 
                   3406:              return (tem && GET_CODE (tem) == CONST_INT
                   3407:                      ? plus_constant (XEXP (op1, 1), INTVAL (tem))
                   3408:                      : 0);
                   3409:            }
                   3410: 
                   3411:          /* Don't let a relocatable value get a negative coeff.  */
                   3412:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
                   3413:            return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
                   3414:          break;
                   3415: 
                   3416:        case MULT:
                   3417:          if (op1 == constm1_rtx)
                   3418:            {
                   3419:              rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
                   3420: 
                   3421:              return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
                   3422:            }
                   3423: 
                   3424:          /* In IEEE floating point, x*0 is not always 0.  */
                   3425:          if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3426:               || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3427:              && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
                   3428:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3429:            return op1;
                   3430: 
                   3431:          /* In IEEE floating point, x*1 is not equivalent to x for nans.
                   3432:             However, ANSI says we can drop signals,
                   3433:             so we can do this anyway.  */
                   3434:          if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
                   3435:            return op0;
                   3436: 
                   3437:          /* Convert multiply by constant power of two into shift.  */
                   3438:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3439:              && (val = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) >= 0)
                   3440:            return gen_rtx (ASHIFT, mode, op0,
                   3441:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val));
                   3442: 
                   3443:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3444:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   3445:            {
                   3446:              REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   3447:              REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
                   3448: 
                   3449:              /* x*2 is x+x and x*(-1) is -x */
                   3450:              if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst2)
                   3451:                  && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
                   3452:                return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, copy_rtx (op0));
                   3453: 
                   3454:              else if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconstm1)
                   3455:                       && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
                   3456:                return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
                   3457:            }
                   3458:          break;
                   3459: 
                   3460:        case IOR:
                   3461:          if (op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3462:            return op0;
                   3463:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3464:              && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
                   3465:            return op1;
                   3466:          if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3467:            return op0;
                   3468:          /* A | (~A) -> -1 */
                   3469:          if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
                   3470:               || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
                   3471:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3472:            return constm1_rtx;
                   3473:          break;
                   3474: 
                   3475:        case XOR:
                   3476:          if (op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3477:            return op0;
                   3478:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3479:              && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
                   3480:            return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op0);
                   3481:          if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3482:            return const0_rtx;
                   3483:          break;
                   3484: 
                   3485:        case AND:
                   3486:          if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3487:            return const0_rtx;
                   3488:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3489:              && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
                   3490:            return op0;
                   3491:          if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3492:            return op0;
                   3493:          /* A & (~A) -> 0 */
                   3494:          if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
                   3495:               || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
                   3496:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3497:            return const0_rtx;
                   3498:          break;
                   3499: 
                   3500:        case UDIV:
                   3501:          /* Convert divide by power of two into shift (divide by 1 handled
                   3502:             below).  */
                   3503:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3504:              && (arg1 = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) > 0)
                   3505:            return gen_rtx (LSHIFTRT, mode, op0,
                   3506:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, arg1));
                   3507: 
                   3508:          /* ... fall through ... */
                   3509: 
                   3510:        case DIV:
                   3511:          if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
                   3512:            return op0;
                   3513:          else if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
                   3514:                   && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3515:            return op0;
                   3516: #if 0 /* Turned off till an expert says this is a safe thing to do.  */
                   3517: #if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   3518:          /* Change division by a constant into multiplication.  */
                   3519:          else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3520:                   && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT
                   3521:                   && op1 != CONST0_RTX (mode))
                   3522:            {
                   3523:              REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
                   3524:              REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
                   3525:              if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst0))
                   3526:                abort();
                   3527: #if defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
                   3528:              REAL_ARITHMETIC (d, RDIV_EXPR, dconst1, d);
                   3529:              return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0, 
                   3530:                              CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode));
                   3531: #else
                   3532:              return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0, 
                   3533:                              CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (1./d, mode));
                   3534:            }
                   3535: #endif
                   3536: #endif
                   3537: #endif
                   3538:          break;
                   3539: 
                   3540:        case UMOD:
                   3541:          /* Handle modulus by power of two (mod with 1 handled below).  */
                   3542:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3543:              && exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1)) > 0)
                   3544:            return gen_rtx (AND, mode, op0, 
                   3545:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, INTVAL (op1) - 1));
                   3546: 
                   3547:          /* ... fall through ... */
                   3548: 
                   3549:        case MOD:
                   3550:          if ((op0 == const0_rtx || op1 == const1_rtx)
                   3551:              && ! side_effects_p (op0) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3552:            return const0_rtx;
                   3553:          break;
                   3554: 
                   3555:        case ROTATERT:
                   3556:        case ROTATE:
                   3557:          /* Rotating ~0 always results in ~0.  */
                   3558:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3559:              && INTVAL (op0) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
                   3560:              && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3561:            return op0;
                   3562: 
                   3563:          /* ... fall through ... */
                   3564: 
                   3565:        case LSHIFT:
                   3566:        case ASHIFT:
                   3567:        case ASHIFTRT:
                   3568:        case LSHIFTRT:
                   3569:          if (op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3570:            return op0;
                   3571:          if (op0 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op1))
                   3572:            return op0;
                   3573:          break;
                   3574: 
                   3575:        case SMIN:
                   3576:          if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT 
                   3577:              && INTVAL (op1) == 1 << (width -1)
                   3578:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3579:            return op1;
                   3580:          else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3581:            return op0;
                   3582:          break;
                   3583:           
                   3584:        case SMAX:
                   3585:          if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3586:              && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1
                   3587:              && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3588:            return op1;
                   3589:          else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3590:            return op0;
                   3591:          break;
                   3592: 
                   3593:        case UMIN:
                   3594:          if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3595:            return op1;
                   3596:          else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3597:            return op0;
                   3598:          break;
                   3599:            
                   3600:        case UMAX:
                   3601:          if (op1 == constm1_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3602:            return op1;
                   3603:          else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
                   3604:            return op0;
                   3605:          break;
                   3606: 
                   3607:        default:
                   3608:          abort ();
                   3609:        }
                   3610:       
                   3611:       return 0;
                   3612:     }
                   3613: 
                   3614:   /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
                   3615:      zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S.  */
                   3616: 
                   3617:   arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
                   3618:   arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
                   3619: 
                   3620:   if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   3621:     {
                   3622:       arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3623:       arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3624: 
                   3625:       arg0s = arg0;
                   3626:       if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
                   3627:        arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
                   3628: 
                   3629:       arg1s = arg1;
                   3630:       if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
                   3631:        arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
                   3632:     }
                   3633:   else
                   3634:     {
                   3635:       arg0s = arg0;
                   3636:       arg1s = arg1;
                   3637:     }
                   3638: 
                   3639:   /* Compute the value of the arithmetic.  */
                   3640: 
                   3641:   switch (code)
                   3642:     {
                   3643:     case PLUS:
                   3644:       val = arg0 + arg1;
                   3645:       break;
                   3646: 
                   3647:     case MINUS:
                   3648:       val = arg0 - arg1;
                   3649:       break;
                   3650: 
                   3651:     case MULT:
                   3652:       val = arg0s * arg1s;
                   3653:       break;
                   3654: 
                   3655:     case DIV:
                   3656:       if (arg1s == 0)
                   3657:        return 0;
                   3658:       val = arg0s / arg1s;
                   3659:       break;
                   3660: 
                   3661:     case MOD:
                   3662:       if (arg1s == 0)
                   3663:        return 0;
                   3664:       val = arg0s % arg1s;
                   3665:       break;
                   3666: 
                   3667:     case UDIV:
                   3668:       if (arg1 == 0)
                   3669:        return 0;
                   3670:       val = (unsigned) arg0 / arg1;
                   3671:       break;
                   3672: 
                   3673:     case UMOD:
                   3674:       if (arg1 == 0)
                   3675:        return 0;
                   3676:       val = (unsigned) arg0 % arg1;
                   3677:       break;
                   3678: 
                   3679:     case AND:
                   3680:       val = arg0 & arg1;
                   3681:       break;
                   3682: 
                   3683:     case IOR:
                   3684:       val = arg0 | arg1;
                   3685:       break;
                   3686: 
                   3687:     case XOR:
                   3688:       val = arg0 ^ arg1;
                   3689:       break;
                   3690: 
                   3691:     case LSHIFTRT:
                   3692:       /* If shift count is undefined, don't fold it; let the machine do
                   3693:         what it wants.  But truncate it if the machine will do that.  */
                   3694:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3695:        return 0;
                   3696: 
                   3697: #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   3698:       arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
                   3699: #endif
                   3700: 
                   3701:       if (arg1 >= width)
                   3702:        return 0;
                   3703: 
                   3704:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1;
                   3705:       break;
                   3706: 
                   3707:     case ASHIFT:
                   3708:     case LSHIFT:
                   3709:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3710:        return 0;
                   3711: 
                   3712: #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   3713:       arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
                   3714: #endif
                   3715: 
                   3716:       if (arg1 >= width)
                   3717:        return 0;
                   3718: 
                   3719:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) << arg1;
                   3720:       break;
                   3721: 
                   3722:     case ASHIFTRT:
                   3723:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3724:        return 0;
                   3725: 
                   3726: #ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
                   3727:       arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
                   3728: #endif
                   3729: 
                   3730:       if (arg1 >= width)
                   3731:        return 0;
                   3732: 
                   3733:       val = arg0s >> arg1;
                   3734:       break;
                   3735: 
                   3736:     case ROTATERT:
                   3737:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3738:        return 0;
                   3739: 
                   3740:       arg1 %= width;
                   3741:       val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << (width - arg1))
                   3742:             | (((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1));
                   3743:       break;
                   3744: 
                   3745:     case ROTATE:
                   3746:       if (arg1 < 0)
                   3747:        return 0;
                   3748: 
                   3749:       arg1 %= width;
                   3750:       val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << arg1)
                   3751:             | (((unsigned) arg0) >> (width - arg1)));
                   3752:       break;
                   3753: 
                   3754:     case COMPARE:
                   3755:       /* Do nothing here.  */
                   3756:       return 0;
                   3757: 
                   3758:     default:
                   3759:       abort ();
                   3760:     }
                   3761: 
                   3762:   /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
                   3763:      bit are all one.  So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
                   3764:      reasonable unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   3765:   if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3766:       && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   3767:     val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3768:   
                   3769:   return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   3770: }
                   3771: 
                   3772: /* Like simplify_binary_operation except used for relational operators.
                   3773:    MODE is the mode of the operands, not that of the result.  */
                   3774: 
                   3775: rtx
                   3776: simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
                   3777:      enum rtx_code code;
                   3778:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   3779:      rtx op0, op1;
                   3780: {
                   3781:   register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
                   3782:   int val;
                   3783:   int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   3784: 
                   3785:   /* If op0 is a compare, extract the comparison arguments from it.  */
                   3786:   if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3787:     op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
                   3788: 
                   3789:   if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
                   3790:       || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
                   3791:     {
                   3792:       /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
                   3793:         there are some cases worth simplifying.  */
                   3794: 
                   3795:       /* For non-IEEE floating-point, if the two operands are equal, we know
                   3796:         the result.  */
                   3797:       if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
                   3798:          && (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   3799:              || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) != MODE_FLOAT))
                   3800:        return (code == EQ || code == GE || code == LE || code == LEU
                   3801:                || code == GEU) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3802:       else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3803:               && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
                   3804:               && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   3805:        {
                   3806:          REAL_VALUE_TYPE d0, d1;
                   3807:          int value;
                   3808:          jmp_buf handler;
                   3809:          int op0lt, op1lt, equal;
                   3810: 
                   3811:          if (setjmp (handler))
                   3812:            return 0;
                   3813: 
                   3814:          set_float_handler (handler);
                   3815:          REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d0, op0);
                   3816:          REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d1, op1);
                   3817:          equal = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d0, d1);
                   3818:          op0lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d0, d1);
                   3819:          op1lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d1, d0);
                   3820:          set_float_handler (0);
                   3821: 
                   3822:          switch (code)
                   3823:            {
                   3824:            case EQ:
                   3825:              return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3826:            case NE:
                   3827:              return !equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3828:            case LE:
                   3829:              return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3830:            case LT:
                   3831:              return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3832:            case GE:
                   3833:              return equal || op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3834:            case GT:
                   3835:              return op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
                   3836:            }
                   3837:        }
                   3838:       
                   3839:       switch (code)
                   3840:        {
                   3841:        case EQ:
                   3842:          {
                   3843: #if 0
                   3844:            /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
                   3845:            if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3846:              return const0_rtx;
                   3847: #endif
                   3848:            if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3849:              return const0_rtx;
                   3850:            break;
                   3851:          }
                   3852: 
                   3853:        case NE:
                   3854: #if 0
                   3855:          /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
                   3856:          if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3857:            return const_true_rtx;
                   3858: #endif
                   3859:          if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
                   3860:            return const_true_rtx;
                   3861:          break;
                   3862: 
                   3863:        case GEU:
                   3864:          /* Unsigned values are never negative, but we must be sure we are
                   3865:             actually comparing a value, not a CC operand.  */
                   3866:          if (op1 == const0_rtx
                   3867:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3868:            return const_true_rtx;
                   3869:          break;
                   3870: 
                   3871:        case LTU:
                   3872:          if (op1 == const0_rtx
                   3873:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3874:            return const0_rtx;
                   3875:          break;
                   3876: 
                   3877:        case LEU:
                   3878:          /* Unsigned values are never greater than the largest
                   3879:             unsigned value.  */
                   3880:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3881:              && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
                   3882:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3883:            return const_true_rtx;
                   3884:          break;
                   3885: 
                   3886:        case GTU:
                   3887:          if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   3888:              && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
                   3889:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
                   3890:            return const0_rtx;
                   3891:          break;
                   3892:        }
                   3893: 
                   3894:       return 0;
                   3895:     }
                   3896: 
                   3897:   /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
                   3898:      zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S.  */
                   3899: 
                   3900:   arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
                   3901:   arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
                   3902: 
                   3903:   if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   3904:     {
                   3905:       arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3906:       arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3907: 
                   3908:       arg0s = arg0;
                   3909:       if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
                   3910:        arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
                   3911: 
                   3912:       arg1s = arg1;
                   3913:       if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
                   3914:        arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
                   3915:     }
                   3916:   else
                   3917:     {
                   3918:       arg0s = arg0;
                   3919:       arg1s = arg1;
                   3920:     }
                   3921: 
                   3922:   /* Compute the value of the arithmetic.  */
                   3923: 
                   3924:   switch (code)
                   3925:     {
                   3926:     case NE:
                   3927:       val = arg0 != arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3928:       break;
                   3929: 
                   3930:     case EQ:
                   3931:       val = arg0 == arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3932:       break;
                   3933: 
                   3934:     case LE:
                   3935:       val = arg0s <= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3936:       break;
                   3937: 
                   3938:     case LT:
                   3939:       val = arg0s < arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3940:       break;
                   3941: 
                   3942:     case GE:
                   3943:       val = arg0s >= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3944:       break;
                   3945: 
                   3946:     case GT:
                   3947:       val = arg0s > arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3948:       break;
                   3949: 
                   3950:     case LEU:
                   3951:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) <= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3952:       break;
                   3953: 
                   3954:     case LTU:
                   3955:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) < ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3956:       break;
                   3957: 
                   3958:     case GEU:
                   3959:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) >= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3960:       break;
                   3961: 
                   3962:     case GTU:
                   3963:       val = ((unsigned) arg0) > ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
                   3964:       break;
                   3965: 
                   3966:     default:
                   3967:       abort ();
                   3968:     }
                   3969: 
                   3970:   /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
                   3971:      bit are all one.  So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
                   3972:      reasonable unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   3973:   if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3974:       && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   3975:     val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   3976:   
                   3977:   return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   3978: }
                   3979: 
                   3980: /* Simplify CODE, an operation with result mode MODE and three operands,
                   3981:    OP0, OP1, and OP2.  OP0_MODE was the mode of OP0 before it became
                   3982:    a constant.  Return 0 if no simplifications is possible.  */
                   3983: 
                   3984: rtx
                   3985: simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, op0, op1, op2)
                   3986:      enum rtx_code code;
                   3987:      enum machine_mode mode, op0_mode;
                   3988:      rtx op0, op1, op2;
                   3989: {
                   3990:   int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   3991: 
                   3992:   /* VOIDmode means "infinite" precision.  */
                   3993:   if (width == 0)
                   3994:     width = HOST_BITS_PER_INT;
                   3995: 
                   3996:   switch (code)
                   3997:     {
                   3998:     case SIGN_EXTRACT:
                   3999:     case ZERO_EXTRACT:
                   4000:       if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT
                   4001:          && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   4002:          && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
                   4003:          && INTVAL (op1) + INTVAL (op2) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode)
                   4004:          && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   4005:        {
                   4006:          /* Extracting a bit-field from a constant */
                   4007:          int val = INTVAL (op0);
                   4008: 
                   4009: #if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
                   4010:          val >>= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode) - INTVAL (op2) - INTVAL (op1));
                   4011: #else
                   4012:          val >>= INTVAL (op2);
                   4013: #endif
                   4014:          if (HOST_BITS_PER_INT != INTVAL (op1))
                   4015:            {
                   4016:              /* First zero-extend.  */
                   4017:              val &= (1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1;
                   4018:              /* If desired, propagate sign bit.  */
                   4019:              if (code == SIGN_EXTRACT && (val & (1 << (INTVAL (op1) - 1))))
                   4020:                val |= ~ (1 << INTVAL (op1));
                   4021:            }
                   4022: 
                   4023:          /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
                   4024:             unless they and our sign bit are all one.
                   4025:             So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
                   4026:             unsigned value for this mode.  */
                   4027:          if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   4028:              && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
                   4029:            val &= (1 << width) - 1;
                   4030: 
                   4031:          return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
                   4032:        }
                   4033:       break;
                   4034: 
                   4035:     case IF_THEN_ELSE:
                   4036:       if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
                   4037:        return op0 != const0_rtx ? op1 : op2;
                   4038:       break;
                   4039: 
                   4040:     default:
                   4041:       abort ();
                   4042:     }
                   4043: 
                   4044:   return 0;
                   4045: }
                   4046: 
                   4047: /* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument
                   4048:    for which a constant value can be determined, return
                   4049:    the result of operating on that value, as a constant.
                   4050:    Otherwise, return X, possibly with one or more operands
                   4051:    modified by recursive calls to this function.
                   4052: 
                   4053:    If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT
                   4054:    return those contents.  This is because an instruction that
                   4055:    uses a register is usually faster than one that uses a constant.
                   4056: 
                   4057:    INSN is the insn that we may be modifying.  If it is 0, make a copy
                   4058:    of X before modifying it.  */
                   4059: 
                   4060: static rtx
                   4061: fold_rtx (x, insn)
                   4062:      rtx x;
                   4063:      rtx insn;    
                   4064: {
                   4065:   register enum rtx_code code;
                   4066:   register enum machine_mode mode;
                   4067:   register char *fmt;
                   4068:   register int i, val;
                   4069:   rtx new = 0;
                   4070:   int copied = 0;
                   4071:   int must_swap = 0;
                   4072: 
                   4073:   /* Folded equivalents of first two operands of X.  */
                   4074:   rtx folded_arg0;
                   4075:   rtx folded_arg1;
                   4076: 
                   4077:   /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
                   4078:      0 when no such equivalent is known.  */
                   4079:   rtx const_arg0;
                   4080:   rtx const_arg1;
                   4081:   rtx const_arg2;
                   4082: 
                   4083:   /* The mode of the first operand of X.  We need this for sign and zero
                   4084:      extends.  */
                   4085:   enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
                   4086: 
                   4087:   if (x == 0)
                   4088:     return x;
                   4089: 
                   4090:   mode = GET_MODE (x);
                   4091:   code = GET_CODE (x);
                   4092:   switch (code)
                   4093:     {
                   4094:     case CONST:
                   4095:     case CONST_INT:
                   4096:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   4097:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   4098:     case LABEL_REF:
                   4099:     case REG:
                   4100:       /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
                   4101:         since they are used only for lists of args
                   4102:         in a function call's REG_EQUAL note.  */
                   4103:     case EXPR_LIST:
                   4104:       return x;
                   4105: 
                   4106: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   4107:     case CC0:
                   4108:       return prev_insn_cc0;
                   4109: #endif
                   4110: 
                   4111:     case PC:
                   4112:       /* If the next insn is a CODE_LABEL followed by a jump table,
                   4113:         PC's value is a LABEL_REF pointing to that label.  That
                   4114:         lets us fold switch statements on the Vax.  */
                   4115:       if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
                   4116:        {
                   4117:          rtx next = next_nonnote_insn (insn);
                   4118: 
                   4119:          if (next && GET_CODE (next) == CODE_LABEL
                   4120:              && NEXT_INSN (next) != 0
                   4121:              && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (next)) == JUMP_INSN
                   4122:              && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_VEC
                   4123:                  || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC))
                   4124:            return gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, next);
                   4125:        }
                   4126:       break;
                   4127: 
                   4128:     case SUBREG:
                   4129:       /* If this is a single word of a multi-word value, see if we previously
                   4130:         assigned a value to that word.  */
                   4131:       if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
                   4132:          && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) > UNITS_PER_WORD
                   4133:          && (new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0)
                   4134:        return new;
                   4135: 
                   4136:       /* Fold SUBREG_REG.  If it changed, see if we can simplify the SUBREG.
                   4137:         We might be able to if the SUBREG is extracting a single word in an
                   4138:         integral mode or extracting the low part.  */
                   4139: 
                   4140:       folded_arg0 = fold_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), insn);
                   4141:       const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
                   4142:       if (const_arg0)
                   4143:        folded_arg0 = const_arg0;
                   4144: 
                   4145:       if (folded_arg0 != SUBREG_REG (x))
                   4146:        {
                   4147:          new = 0;
                   4148: 
                   4149:          if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   4150:              && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
                   4151:              && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode)
                   4152:            new = operand_subword (folded_arg0, SUBREG_WORD (x), 0,
                   4153:                                   GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
                   4154:          if (new == 0 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
                   4155:            new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, folded_arg0);
                   4156:          if (new)
                   4157:            return new;
                   4158:        }
                   4159:       return x;
                   4160: 
                   4161:     case NOT:
                   4162:     case NEG:
                   4163:       /* If we have (NOT Y), see if Y is known to be (NOT Z).
                   4164:         If so, (NOT Y) simplifies to Z.  Similarly for NEG.  */
                   4165:       new = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), code);
                   4166:       if (new)
                   4167:        return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (XEXP (new, 0)), insn);
                   4168:       break;
                   4169:       
                   4170:     case MEM:
                   4171:       /* If we are not actually processing an insn, don't try to find the
                   4172:         best address.  Not only don't we care, but we could modify the
                   4173:         MEM in an invalid way since we have no insn to validate against.  */
                   4174:       if (insn != 0)
                   4175:        find_best_addr (insn, &XEXP (x, 0));
                   4176: 
                   4177:       {
                   4178:        /* Even if we don't fold in the insn itself,
                   4179:           we can safely do so here, in hopes of getting a constant.  */
                   4180:        rtx addr = fold_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                   4181:        rtx base = 0;
                   4182:        int offset = 0;
                   4183: 
                   4184:        if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
                   4185:            && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
                   4186:            && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
                   4187:            && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
                   4188:          addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
                   4189: 
                   4190:        /* If address is constant, split it into a base and integer offset.  */
                   4191:        if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (addr) == LABEL_REF)
                   4192:          base = addr;
                   4193:        else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS
                   4194:                 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   4195:          {
                   4196:            base = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0);
                   4197:            offset = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1));
                   4198:          }
                   4199:        else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM
                   4200:                 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF)
                   4201:          base = XEXP (addr, 1);
                   4202: 
                   4203:        /* If this is a constant pool reference, we can fold it into its
                   4204:           constant to allow better value tracking.  */
                   4205:        if (base && GET_CODE (base) == SYMBOL_REF
                   4206:            && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (base))
                   4207:          {
                   4208:            rtx constant = get_pool_constant (base);
                   4209:            enum machine_mode const_mode = get_pool_mode (base);
                   4210:            rtx new;
                   4211: 
                   4212:            if (CONSTANT_P (constant) && GET_CODE (constant) != CONST_INT)
                   4213:              constant_pool_entries_cost = COST (constant);
                   4214: 
                   4215:            /* If we are loading the full constant, we have an equivalence.  */
                   4216:            if (offset == 0 && mode == const_mode)
                   4217:              return constant;
                   4218: 
                   4219:            /* If this actually isn't a constant (wierd!), we can't do
                   4220:               anything.  Otherwise, handle the two most common cases:
                   4221:               extracting a word from a multi-word constant, and extracting
                   4222:               the low-order bits.  Other cases don't seem common enough to
                   4223:               worry about.  */
                   4224:            if (! CONSTANT_P (constant))
                   4225:              return x;
                   4226: 
                   4227:            if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                   4228:                && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
                   4229:                && offset % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0
                   4230:                && (new = operand_subword (constant,
                   4231:                                           offset / UNITS_PER_WORD,
                   4232:                                           0, const_mode)) != 0)
                   4233:              return new;
                   4234: 
                   4235:            if (((BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
                   4236:                  && offset == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (constant)) - 1)
                   4237:                 || (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && offset == 0))
                   4238:                && (new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, constant)) != 0)
                   4239:              return new;
                   4240:          }
                   4241: 
                   4242:        /* If this is a reference to a label at a known position in a jump
                   4243:           table, we also know its value.  */
                   4244:        if (base && GET_CODE (base) == LABEL_REF)
                   4245:          {
                   4246:            rtx label = XEXP (base, 0);
                   4247:            rtx table_insn = NEXT_INSN (label);
                   4248:            
                   4249:            if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
                   4250:                && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_VEC)
                   4251:              {
                   4252:                rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
                   4253: 
                   4254:                if (offset >= 0
                   4255:                    && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
                   4256:                        < XVECLEN (table, 0)))
                   4257:                  return XVECEXP (table, 0,
                   4258:                                  offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table)));
                   4259:              }
                   4260:            if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
                   4261:                && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC)
                   4262:              {
                   4263:                rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
                   4264: 
                   4265:                if (offset >= 0
                   4266:                    && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
                   4267:                        < XVECLEN (table, 1)))
                   4268:                  {
                   4269:                    offset /= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table));
                   4270:                    new = gen_rtx (MINUS, Pmode, XVECEXP (table, 1, offset),
                   4271:                                   XEXP (table, 0));
                   4272: 
                   4273:                    if (GET_MODE (table) != Pmode)
                   4274:                      new = gen_rtx (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (table), new);
                   4275: 
                   4276:                    return new;
                   4277:                  }
                   4278:              }
                   4279:          }
                   4280: 
                   4281:        return x;
                   4282:       }
                   4283:     }
                   4284: 
                   4285:   const_arg0 = 0;
                   4286:   const_arg1 = 0;
                   4287:   const_arg2 = 0;
                   4288:   mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
                   4289: 
                   4290:   /* Try folding our operands.
                   4291:      Then see which ones have constant values known.  */
                   4292: 
                   4293:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   4294:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   4295:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   4296:       {
                   4297:        rtx arg = XEXP (x, i);
                   4298:        rtx folded_arg = arg, const_arg = 0;
                   4299:        enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (arg);
                   4300:        rtx cheap_arg, expensive_arg;
                   4301:        rtx replacements[2];
                   4302:        int j;
                   4303: 
                   4304:        /* Most arguments are cheap, so handle them specially.  */
                   4305:        switch (GET_CODE (arg))
                   4306:          {
                   4307:          case REG:
                   4308:            /* This is the same as calling equiv_constant; it is duplicated
                   4309:               here for speed.  */
                   4310:            if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (arg))
                   4311:                && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]] != 0
                   4312:                && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != REG
                   4313:                && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != PLUS)
                   4314:              const_arg
                   4315:                = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (arg),
                   4316:                                           qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]);
                   4317:            break;
                   4318: 
                   4319:          case CONST:
                   4320:          case CONST_INT:
                   4321:          case SYMBOL_REF:
                   4322:          case LABEL_REF:
                   4323:          case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   4324:            const_arg = arg;
                   4325:            break;
                   4326: 
                   4327: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   4328:          case CC0:
                   4329:            folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
                   4330:            mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
                   4331:            const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
                   4332:            break;
                   4333: #endif
                   4334: 
                   4335:          default:
                   4336:            folded_arg = fold_rtx (arg, insn);
                   4337:            const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
                   4338:          }
                   4339: 
                   4340:        /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
                   4341:           is constant or equivalent to a constant.  */
                   4342:        switch (i)
                   4343:          {
                   4344:          case 0:
                   4345:            folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
                   4346:            const_arg0 = const_arg;
                   4347:            mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
                   4348:            break;
                   4349:          case 1:
                   4350:            folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
                   4351:            const_arg1 = const_arg;
                   4352:            break;
                   4353:          case 2:
                   4354:            const_arg2 = const_arg;
                   4355:            break;
                   4356:          }
                   4357: 
                   4358:        /* Pick the least expensive of the folded argument and an
                   4359:           equivalent constant argument.  */
                   4360:        if (const_arg == 0 || const_arg == folded_arg
                   4361:            || COST (const_arg) > COST (folded_arg))
                   4362:          cheap_arg = folded_arg, expensive_arg = const_arg;
                   4363:        else
                   4364:          cheap_arg = const_arg, expensive_arg = folded_arg;
                   4365: 
                   4366:        /* Try to replace the operand with the cheapest of the two
                   4367:           possibilities.  If it doesn't work and this is either of the first
                   4368:           two operands of a commutative operation, try swapping them.
                   4369:           If THAT fails, try the more expensive, provided it is cheaper
                   4370:           than what is already there.  */
                   4371: 
                   4372:        if (cheap_arg == XEXP (x, i))
                   4373:          continue;
                   4374: 
                   4375:        if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
                   4376:          {
                   4377:            x = copy_rtx (x);
                   4378:            copied = 1;
                   4379:          }
                   4380: 
                   4381:        replacements[0] = cheap_arg, replacements[1] = expensive_arg;
                   4382:        for (j = 0;
                   4383:             j < 2 && replacements[j]
                   4384:             && COST (replacements[j]) < COST (XEXP (x, i));
                   4385:             j++)
                   4386:          {
                   4387:            if (validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), replacements[j], 0))
                   4388:              break;
                   4389: 
                   4390:            if (code == NE || code == EQ || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
                   4391:              {
                   4392:                validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), XEXP (x, 1 - i), 1);
                   4393:                validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1 - i), replacements[j], 1);
                   4394: 
                   4395:                if (apply_change_group ())
                   4396:                  {
                   4397:                    /* Swap them back to be invalid so that this loop can
                   4398:                       continue and flag them to be swapped back later.  */
                   4399:                    rtx tem;
                   4400: 
                   4401:                    tem = XEXP (x, 0); XEXP (x, 0) = XEXP (x, 1);
                   4402:                                       XEXP (x, 1) = tem;
                   4403:                    must_swap = 1;
                   4404:                    break;
                   4405:                  }
                   4406:              }
                   4407:          }
                   4408:       }
                   4409: 
                   4410:     else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   4411:       /* Don't try to fold inside of a vector of expressions.
                   4412:         Doing nothing is harmless.  */
                   4413:       ;
                   4414: 
                   4415:   /* If a commutative operation, place a constant integer as the second
                   4416:      operand unless the first operand is also a constant integer.  Otherwise,
                   4417:      place any constant second unless the first operand is also a constant.  */
                   4418: 
                   4419:   if (code == EQ || code == NE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
                   4420:     {
                   4421:       if (must_swap || (const_arg0
                   4422:                        && (const_arg1 == 0
                   4423:                            || (GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST_INT
                   4424:                                && GET_CODE (const_arg1) != CONST_INT))))
                   4425:        {
                   4426:          register rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
                   4427: 
                   4428:          if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
                   4429:            {
                   4430:              x = copy_rtx (x);
                   4431:              copied = 1;
                   4432:            }
                   4433: 
                   4434:          validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1), 1);
                   4435:          validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1), tem, 1);
                   4436:          if (apply_change_group ())
                   4437:            {
                   4438:              tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
                   4439:              tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
                   4440:            }
                   4441:        }
                   4442:     }
                   4443: 
                   4444:   /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it.  */
                   4445: 
                   4446:   switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
                   4447:     {
                   4448:     case '1':
                   4449:       new = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
                   4450:                                      const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
                   4451:                                      mode_arg0);
                   4452:       break;
                   4453:       
                   4454:     case '<':
                   4455:       /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
                   4456:         to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code.  If any are
                   4457:         constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately.  We needn't
                   4458:         do anything if both operands are already known to be constant.  */
                   4459: 
                   4460:       if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
                   4461:        {
                   4462:          struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
                   4463: 
                   4464:          code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1);
                   4465:          const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
                   4466:          const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
                   4467: 
                   4468:          /* Get a mode from the values actually being compared, or from the
                   4469:             old value of MODE_ARG0 if both are constants.  If the resulting
                   4470:             mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know what kinds
                   4471:             of things are being compared, so we can't do anything with this
                   4472:             comparison.  */
                   4473: 
                   4474:          if (GET_MODE (folded_arg0) != VOIDmode
                   4475:              && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)) != MODE_CC)
                   4476:            mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg0);
                   4477: 
                   4478:          else if (GET_MODE (folded_arg1) != VOIDmode
                   4479:                   && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg1)) != MODE_CC)
                   4480:            mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg1);
                   4481: 
                   4482:          if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
                   4483:            break;
                   4484: 
                   4485:          /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see if we
                   4486:             can nevertheless deduce some things about the comparison.  */
                   4487:          if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
                   4488:            {
                   4489:              /* Is FOLDED_ARG0 frame-pointer plus a constant?  Or non-explicit
                   4490:                 constant?  These aren't zero, but we don't know their sign. */
                   4491:              if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx
                   4492:                  && (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (folded_arg0)
                   4493: #if 0  /* Sad to say, on sysvr4, #pragma weak can make a symbol address
                   4494:          come out as 0.  */
                   4495:                      || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == SYMBOL_REF
                   4496: #endif
                   4497:                      || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == LABEL_REF
                   4498:                      || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST))
                   4499:                {
                   4500:                  if (code == EQ)
                   4501:                    return const0_rtx;
                   4502:                  else if (code == NE)
                   4503:                    return const_true_rtx;
                   4504:                }
                   4505: 
                   4506:              /* See if the two operands are the same.  We don't do this
                   4507:                 for IEEE floating-point since we can't assume x == x
                   4508:                 since x might be a NaN.  */
                   4509: 
                   4510:              if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
                   4511:                   || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) != MODE_FLOAT)
                   4512:                  && (folded_arg0 == folded_arg1
                   4513:                      || (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
                   4514:                          && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
                   4515:                          && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)]
                   4516:                              == reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]))
                   4517:                      || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
                   4518:                                        (safe_hash (folded_arg0, mode_arg0)
                   4519:                                         % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
                   4520:                          && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
                   4521:                                           (safe_hash (folded_arg1, mode_arg0)
                   4522:                                            % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
                   4523:                          && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value)))
                   4524:                return ((code == EQ || code == LE || code == GE
                   4525:                         || code == LEU || code == GEU)
                   4526:                        ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx);
                   4527: 
                   4528:              /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
                   4529:                 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
                   4530:                 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point).  */
                   4531:              else if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG)
                   4532:                {
                   4533:                  int qty = reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)];
                   4534: 
                   4535:                  if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0))
                   4536:                      && (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty], code)
                   4537:                          || (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
                   4538:                                                      reverse_condition (code))
                   4539:                              && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_INT))
                   4540:                      && (rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty], folded_arg1)
                   4541:                          || (const_arg1
                   4542:                              && rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty],
                   4543:                                              const_arg1))
                   4544:                          || (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
                   4545:                              && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]
                   4546:                                  == qty_comparison_qty[qty]))))
                   4547:                    return (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
                   4548:                                                    code)
                   4549:                            ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx);
                   4550:                }
                   4551:            }
                   4552:        }
                   4553: 
                   4554:       /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
                   4555:         equivalent to an IOR with a constant.  If so, we may be able to
                   4556:         determine the result of this comparison.  */
                   4557: 
                   4558:       if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx)
                   4559:        {
                   4560:          rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
                   4561:          rtx inner_const;
                   4562: 
                   4563:          if (y != 0
                   4564:              && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
                   4565:              && GET_CODE (inner_const) == CONST_INT
                   4566:              && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
                   4567:            {
                   4568:              int sign_bitnum = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode_arg0) - 1;
                   4569:              int has_sign = (HOST_BITS_PER_INT >= sign_bitnum
                   4570:                              && (INTVAL (inner_const) & (1 << sign_bitnum)));
                   4571: 
                   4572:              switch (code)
                   4573:                {
                   4574:                case EQ:
                   4575:                  return const0_rtx;
                   4576:                case NE:
                   4577:                  return const_true_rtx;
                   4578:                case LT:  case LE:
                   4579:                  if (has_sign)
                   4580:                    return const_true_rtx;
                   4581:                  break;
                   4582:                case GT:  case GE:
                   4583:                  if (has_sign)
                   4584:                    return const0_rtx;
                   4585:                  break;
                   4586:                }
                   4587:            }
                   4588:        }
                   4589: 
                   4590:       new = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode_arg0,
                   4591:                                           const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
                   4592:                                           const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
                   4593:       break;
                   4594: 
                   4595:     case '2':
                   4596:     case 'c':
                   4597:       switch (code)
                   4598:        {
                   4599:        case PLUS:
                   4600:          /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
                   4601:             with that LABEL_REF as its second operand.  If so, the result is
                   4602:             the first operand of that MINUS.  This handles switches with an
                   4603:             ADDR_DIFF_VEC table.  */
                   4604:          if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
                   4605:            {
                   4606:              rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
                   4607: 
                   4608:              if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
                   4609:                  && XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
                   4610:                return XEXP (y, 0);
                   4611:            }
                   4612: 
                   4613:          /* ... fall through ... */
                   4614: 
                   4615:        case MINUS:
                   4616:        case SMIN:    case SMAX:      case UMIN:    case UMAX:
                   4617:        case IOR:     case AND:       case XOR:
                   4618:        case MULT:    case DIV:       case UDIV:
                   4619:        case ASHIFT:  case LSHIFTRT:  case ASHIFTRT:
                   4620:          /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
                   4621:             is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
                   4622:             operation with a combined operation.  This may eliminate the
                   4623:             intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
                   4624:             Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
                   4625:             if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference.  */
                   4626: 
                   4627:          if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
                   4628:              && const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
                   4629:            {
                   4630:              int is_shift
                   4631:                = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
                   4632:              rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
                   4633:              rtx inner_const;
                   4634:              enum rtx_code associate_code;
                   4635:              rtx new_const;
                   4636: 
                   4637:              if (y == 0
                   4638:                  || 0 == (inner_const
                   4639:                           = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0)))
                   4640:                  || GET_CODE (inner_const) != CONST_INT
                   4641:                  /* If we have compiled a statement like
                   4642:                     "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
                   4643:                     "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
                   4644:                     of Y is the same as our first operand.  Unless we detect
                   4645:                     this case, an infinite loop will result.  */
                   4646:                  || XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
                   4647:                break;
                   4648: 
                   4649:              /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
                   4650:                 same constant and it is a power of two.  These might be doable
                   4651:                 with a pre- or post-increment.  Similarly for two subtracts of
                   4652:                 identical powers of two with post decrement.  */
                   4653: 
                   4654:              if (code == PLUS && INTVAL (const_arg1) == INTVAL (inner_const)
                   4655:                  && (0
                   4656: #if defined(HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_INCREMENT)
                   4657:                      || exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
                   4658: #endif
                   4659: #if defined(HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_DECREMENT)
                   4660:                      || exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
                   4661: #endif
                   4662:                  ))
                   4663:                break;
                   4664: 
                   4665:              /* Compute the code used to compose the constants.  For example,
                   4666:                 A/C1/C2 is A/(C1 * C2), so if CODE == DIV, we want MULT.  */
                   4667: 
                   4668:              associate_code
                   4669:                = (code == MULT || code == DIV || code == UDIV ? MULT
                   4670:                   : is_shift || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
                   4671: 
                   4672:              new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
                   4673:                                                     const_arg1, inner_const);
                   4674: 
                   4675:              if (new_const == 0)
                   4676:                break;
                   4677: 
                   4678:              /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
                   4679:                 produce a shift of larger than the object.  This could
                   4680:                 occur when we following a sign-extend by a right shift on
                   4681:                 a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair of shifts.  */
                   4682: 
                   4683:              if (is_shift && GET_CODE (new_const) == CONST_INT
                   4684:                  && INTVAL (new_const) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
                   4685:                break;
                   4686: 
                   4687:              y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
                   4688: 
                   4689:              /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
                   4690:                 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
                   4691:                 loop if we tried to fold it.  So don't in that case.  */
                   4692: 
                   4693:              if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
                   4694:                y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
                   4695: 
                   4696:              new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, y, new_const);
                   4697:              if (new)
                   4698:                return new;
                   4699: 
                   4700:              return gen_rtx (code, mode, y, new_const);
                   4701:            }
                   4702:        }
                   4703: 
                   4704:       new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
                   4705:                                       const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
                   4706:                                       const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
                   4707:       break;
                   4708: 
                   4709:     case '3':
                   4710:     case 'b':
                   4711:       new = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
                   4712:                                        const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
                   4713:                                        const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
                   4714:                                        const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
                   4715:       break;
                   4716:     }
                   4717: 
                   4718:   return new ? new : x;
                   4719: }
                   4720: 
                   4721: /* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
                   4722:    Return 0 if we don't know one.  */
                   4723: 
                   4724: static rtx
                   4725: equiv_constant (x)
                   4726:      rtx x;
                   4727: {
                   4728:   if (GET_CODE (x) == REG
                   4729:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
                   4730:       && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
                   4731:     x = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]);
                   4732: 
                   4733:   if (x != 0 && CONSTANT_P (x))
                   4734:     return x;
                   4735: 
                   4736:   return 0;
                   4737: }
                   4738: 
                   4739: /* Assuming that X is an rtx (e.g., MEM, REG or SUBREG) for a fixed-point
                   4740:    number, return an rtx (MEM, SUBREG, or CONST_INT) that refers to the
                   4741:    least-significant part of X.
                   4742:    MODE specifies how big a part of X to return.  
                   4743: 
                   4744:    If the requested operation cannot be done, 0 is returned.
                   4745: 
                   4746:    This is similar to gen_lowpart in emit-rtl.c.  */
                   4747: 
                   4748: rtx
                   4749: gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, x)
                   4750:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   4751:      register rtx x;
                   4752: {
                   4753:   rtx result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
                   4754: 
                   4755:   if (result)
                   4756:     return result;
                   4757:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
                   4758:     {
                   4759:       /* This is the only other case we handle.  */
                   4760:       register int offset = 0;
                   4761:       rtx new;
                   4762: 
                   4763: #if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
                   4764:       offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD)
                   4765:                - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD));
                   4766: #endif
                   4767: #if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
                   4768:       /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data
                   4769:         is unchanged.  */
                   4770:       offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
                   4771:                 - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
                   4772: #endif
                   4773:       new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset));
                   4774:       if (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (new, 0)))
                   4775:        return 0;
                   4776:       MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
                   4777:       RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x);
                   4778:       MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x);
                   4779:       return new;
                   4780:     }
                   4781:   else
                   4782:     return 0;
                   4783: }
                   4784: 
                   4785: /* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the "taken"
                   4786:    branch.  It will be zero if not.
                   4787: 
                   4788:    In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence.  For example,
                   4789:    if we are following the taken case of 
                   4790:        if (i == 2)
                   4791:    we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
                   4792: 
                   4793:    In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed.  If the same
                   4794:    comparison is seen later, we will know its value.  */
                   4795: 
                   4796: static void
                   4797: record_jump_equiv (insn, taken)
                   4798:      rtx insn;
                   4799:      int taken;
                   4800: {
                   4801:   int cond_known_true;
                   4802:   rtx op0, op1;
                   4803:   enum machine_mode mode;
                   4804:   int reversed_nonequality = 0;
                   4805:   enum rtx_code code;
                   4806: 
                   4807:   /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn.  */
                   4808:   if (! condjump_p (insn) || simplejump_p (insn))
                   4809:     return;
                   4810: 
                   4811:   /* See if this jump condition is known true or false.  */
                   4812:   if (taken)
                   4813:     cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 2) == pc_rtx);
                   4814:   else
                   4815:     cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 1) == pc_rtx);
                   4816: 
                   4817:   /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
                   4818:      If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
                   4819:      know that it isn't valid for floating-point.  */
                   4820:   code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0));
                   4821:   op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 0), insn);
                   4822:   op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 1), insn);
                   4823: 
                   4824:   code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1);
                   4825:   if (! cond_known_true)
                   4826:     {
                   4827:       reversed_nonequality = (code != EQ && code != NE);
                   4828:       code = reverse_condition (code);
                   4829:     }
                   4830: 
                   4831:   /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant.  */
                   4832:   mode = GET_MODE (op0);
                   4833:   if (mode == VOIDmode) mode = GET_MODE (op1);
                   4834: 
                   4835:   record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
                   4836: }
                   4837: 
                   4838: /* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
                   4839:    REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
                   4840:    Make any useful entries we can with that information.  Called from
                   4841:    above function and called recursively.  */
                   4842: 
                   4843: static void
                   4844: record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality)
                   4845:      enum rtx_code code;
                   4846:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   4847:      rtx op0, op1;
                   4848:      int reversed_nonequality;
                   4849: {
                   4850:   int op0_hash_code, op1_hash_code;
                   4851:   int op0_in_memory, op0_in_struct, op1_in_memory, op1_in_struct;
                   4852:   struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
                   4853: 
                   4854:   /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
                   4855:      we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
                   4856:      true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
                   4857:      is not worth testing for with no SUBREG.  */
                   4858: 
                   4859:   if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
                   4860:       && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
                   4861:     {
                   4862:       enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
                   4863:       rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
                   4864: 
                   4865:       record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
                   4866:                        tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
                   4867:                        reversed_nonequality);
                   4868:     }
                   4869: 
                   4870:   if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
                   4871:       && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
                   4872:     {
                   4873:       enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
                   4874:       rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
                   4875: 
                   4876:       record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
                   4877:                        tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
                   4878:                        reversed_nonequality);
                   4879:     }
                   4880: 
                   4881:   /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG 
                   4882:      making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE.  */
                   4883: 
                   4884:   if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
                   4885:       && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
                   4886:       && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
                   4887:     {
                   4888:       enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
                   4889:       rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
                   4890: 
                   4891:       record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
                   4892:                        tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
                   4893:                        reversed_nonequality);
                   4894:     }
                   4895: 
                   4896:   if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
                   4897:       && subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
                   4898:       && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
                   4899:     {
                   4900:       enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
                   4901:       rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
                   4902: 
                   4903:       record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
                   4904:                        tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
                   4905:                        reversed_nonequality);
                   4906:     }
                   4907: 
                   4908:   /* Hash both operands.  */
                   4909: 
                   4910:   do_not_record = 0;
                   4911:   hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   4912:   hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   4913:   op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
                   4914:   op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   4915:   op0_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   4916: 
                   4917:   if (do_not_record)
                   4918:     return;
                   4919: 
                   4920:   do_not_record = 0;
                   4921:   hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   4922:   hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   4923:   op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
                   4924:   op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   4925:   op1_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   4926:   
                   4927:   if (do_not_record)
                   4928:     return;
                   4929: 
                   4930:   /* Look up both operands.  */
                   4931:   op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash_code, mode);
                   4932:   op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash_code, mode);
                   4933: 
                   4934:   /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
                   4935:      comparison.  */
                   4936:   if (code != EQ)
                   4937:     {
                   4938:       /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
                   4939:         register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
                   4940:         do anything.  */
                   4941: 
                   4942:       if (GET_CODE (op1) != REG)
                   4943:        op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
                   4944: 
                   4945:       if ((reversed_nonequality && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
                   4946:          || GET_CODE (op0) != REG || op1 == 0)
                   4947:        return;
                   4948: 
                   4949:       /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already.  This gives it a
                   4950:         new quantity number.  */
                   4951:       if (op0_elt == 0)
                   4952:        {
                   4953:          if (insert_regs (op0, 0, 0))
                   4954:            {
                   4955:              rehash_using_reg (op0);
                   4956:              op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
                   4957:            }
                   4958: 
                   4959:          op0_elt = insert (op0, 0, op0_hash_code, mode);
                   4960:          op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
                   4961:          op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
                   4962:        }
                   4963: 
                   4964:       qty_comparison_code[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = code;
                   4965:       if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG)
                   4966:        {
                   4967:          /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number.  */
                   4968:          if (op1_elt == 0)
                   4969:            {
                   4970:              if (insert_regs (op1, 0, 0))
                   4971:                {
                   4972:                  rehash_using_reg (op1);
                   4973:                  op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
                   4974:                }
                   4975: 
                   4976:              op1_elt = insert (op1, 0, op1_hash_code, mode);
                   4977:              op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
                   4978:              op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
                   4979:            }
                   4980: 
                   4981:          qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = reg_qty[REGNO (op1)];
                   4982:          qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = 0;
                   4983:        }
                   4984:       else
                   4985:        {
                   4986:          qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = -1;
                   4987:          qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = op1;
                   4988:        }
                   4989: 
                   4990:       return;
                   4991:     }
                   4992: 
                   4993:   /* If both are equivalent, merge the two classes.  Save this class for
                   4994:      `cse_set_around_loop'.  */
                   4995:   if (op0_elt && op1_elt)
                   4996:     {
                   4997:       merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
                   4998:       last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
                   4999:     }
                   5000: 
                   5001:   /* For whichever side doesn't have an equivalence, make one.  */
                   5002:   if (op0_elt == 0)
                   5003:     {
                   5004:       if (insert_regs (op0, op1_elt, 0))
                   5005:        {
                   5006:          rehash_using_reg (op0);
                   5007:          op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
                   5008:        }
                   5009: 
                   5010:       op0_elt = insert (op0, op1_elt, op0_hash_code, mode);
                   5011:       op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
                   5012:       op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
                   5013:       last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
                   5014:     }
                   5015: 
                   5016:   if (op1_elt == 0)
                   5017:     {
                   5018:       if (insert_regs (op1, op0_elt, 0))
                   5019:        {
                   5020:          rehash_using_reg (op1);
                   5021:          op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
                   5022:        }
                   5023: 
                   5024:       op1_elt = insert (op1, op0_elt, op1_hash_code, mode);
                   5025:       op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
                   5026:       op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
                   5027:       last_jump_equiv_class = op1_elt;
                   5028:     }
                   5029: }
                   5030: 
                   5031: /* CSE processing for one instruction.
                   5032:    First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
                   5033:    in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
                   5034:    Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
                   5035:    of available values. 
                   5036: 
                   5037:    If IN_LIBCALL_BLOCK is nonzero, don't record any equivalence made in
                   5038:    the insn.  */
                   5039: 
                   5040: /* Data on one SET contained in the instruction.  */
                   5041: 
                   5042: struct set
                   5043: {
                   5044:   /* The SET rtx itself.  */
                   5045:   rtx rtl;
                   5046:   /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing).  */
                   5047:   rtx src;
                   5048:   /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET.  */
                   5049:   struct table_elt *src_elt;
                   5050:   /* Hash code for the SET_SRC.  */
                   5051:   int src_hash_code;
                   5052:   /* Hash code for the SET_DEST.  */
                   5053:   int dest_hash_code;
                   5054:   /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped.  */
                   5055:   rtx inner_dest;
                   5056:   /* Place where the pointer to the INNER_DEST was found.  */
                   5057:   rtx *inner_dest_loc;
                   5058:   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory.  */ 
                   5059:   char src_in_memory;
                   5060:   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in a structure.  */ 
                   5061:   char src_in_struct;
                   5062:   /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
                   5063:      whose value cannot be predicted and understood.  */
                   5064:   char src_volatile;
                   5065:   /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT.  */
                   5066:   enum machine_mode mode;
                   5067:   /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any.  */
                   5068:   rtx src_const;
                   5069:   /* Hash code of constant equivalent for SET_SRC.  */
                   5070:   int src_const_hash_code;
                   5071:   /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any.  */
                   5072:   struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
                   5073: };
                   5074: 
                   5075: static void
                   5076: cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block)
                   5077:      rtx insn;
                   5078:      int in_libcall_block;
                   5079: {
                   5080:   register rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
                   5081:   rtx tem;
                   5082:   register int i;
                   5083:   register int n_sets = 0;
                   5084: 
                   5085:   /* Records what this insn does to set CC0.  */
                   5086:   rtx this_insn_cc0 = 0;
                   5087:   enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode;
                   5088:   struct write_data writes_memory;
                   5089:   static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
                   5090: 
                   5091:   rtx src_eqv = 0;
                   5092:   struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
                   5093:   int src_eqv_volatile;
                   5094:   int src_eqv_in_memory;
                   5095:   int src_eqv_in_struct;
                   5096:   int src_eqv_hash_code;
                   5097: 
                   5098:   struct set *sets;
                   5099: 
                   5100:   this_insn = insn;
                   5101:   writes_memory = init;
                   5102: 
                   5103:   /* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
                   5104:      Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
                   5105:      Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
                   5106:      all memory references, or all references at varying addresses.  */
                   5107: 
                   5108:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
                   5109:     {
                   5110:       sets = (struct set *) alloca (sizeof (struct set));
                   5111:       sets[0].rtl = x;
                   5112: 
                   5113:       /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
                   5114:         They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
                   5115:         The reason is not efficiency but rather
                   5116:         so that we can test at the end for instructions
                   5117:         that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
                   5118:         and not be misled by unchanged instructions
                   5119:         that were unconditional jumps to begin with.  */
                   5120:       if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
                   5121:          && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
                   5122:        ;
                   5123: 
                   5124:       /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
                   5125:         The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
                   5126:         someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
                   5127:         Ensure we invalidate the destination register.  On the 80386 no
                   5128:         other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg.  */
                   5129: 
                   5130:       else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
                   5131:        {
                   5132:          canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
                   5133:          fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
                   5134:          invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
                   5135:        }
                   5136:       else
                   5137:        n_sets = 1;
                   5138:     }
                   5139:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
                   5140:     {
                   5141:       register int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
                   5142: 
                   5143:       sets = (struct set *) alloca (lim * sizeof (struct set));
                   5144: 
                   5145:       /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
                   5146:         and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
                   5147:         elsewhere in this insn.
                   5148:         When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
                   5149:         we should presume that that is for a reason,
                   5150:         and we should not substitute some other register
                   5151:         which is not supposed to be clobbered.
                   5152:         Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
                   5153:         because a CALL may preceed a CLOBBER and refer to the
                   5154:         value clobbered.  We must not let a canonicalization do
                   5155:         anything in that case.  */
                   5156:       for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
                   5157:        {
                   5158:          register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
                   5159:          if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG)
                   5160:            invalidate (XEXP (y, 0));
                   5161:        }
                   5162:            
                   5163:       for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
                   5164:        {
                   5165:          register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
                   5166:          if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
                   5167:            {
                   5168:              /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns. */
                   5169:              if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
                   5170:                {
                   5171:                  canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
                   5172:                  fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
                   5173:                  invalidate (SET_DEST (y));
                   5174:                }
                   5175:              else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
                   5176:                       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
                   5177:                ;
                   5178:              else
                   5179:                sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
                   5180:            }
                   5181:          else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
                   5182:            {
                   5183:              /* If we clobber memory, take note of that,
                   5184:                 and canon the address.
                   5185:                 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
                   5186:                 because we have already invalidated the reg.  */
                   5187:              if (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MEM)
                   5188:                {
                   5189:                  canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
                   5190:                  note_mem_written (XEXP (y, 0), &writes_memory);
                   5191:                }
                   5192:            }
                   5193:          else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
                   5194:                   && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
                   5195:                         && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   5196:            canon_reg (y, 0);
                   5197:          else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
                   5198:            {
                   5199:              canon_reg (y, insn);
                   5200:              fold_rtx (y, insn);
                   5201:            }
                   5202:        }
                   5203:     }
                   5204:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
                   5205:     {
                   5206:       if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
                   5207:        {
                   5208:          canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                   5209:          note_mem_written (XEXP (x, 0), &writes_memory);
                   5210:        }
                   5211:     }
                   5212: 
                   5213:   /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location.  */
                   5214:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
                   5215:           && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
                   5216:                 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   5217:     canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                   5218:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
                   5219:     {
                   5220:       canon_reg (x, insn);
                   5221:       fold_rtx (x, insn);
                   5222:     }
                   5223: 
                   5224:   if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0)
                   5225:     {
                   5226:       /* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different.  */
                   5227:       rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
                   5228: 
                   5229:       if (tem && ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
                   5230:         src_eqv = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), 0);
                   5231:     }
                   5232: 
                   5233:   /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
                   5234:      We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
                   5235:      present in the insn pattern.  In that case, we want to ensure that
                   5236:      we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern.  So we will replace
                   5237:      both operands at the same time.  Otherwise, we would fail to find an
                   5238:      equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
                   5239:      (We also speed up that loop when a canonicalization was done since
                   5240:      recog_memoized need not be called for just a canonicalization unless
                   5241:      a pseudo register is being replaced by a hard reg of vice versa.)
                   5242: 
                   5243:      We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
                   5244:      but we don't do this any more.
                   5245: 
                   5246:      ??? The way this code is written now, if we have a MATCH_DUP between
                   5247:      two operands that are pseudos and we would want to canonicalize them
                   5248:      to a hard register, we won't do that.  The only time this would happen
                   5249:      is if the hard reg was a fixed register, and this should be rare.
                   5250: 
                   5251:      ??? This won't work if there is a MATCH_DUP between an input and an
                   5252:      output, but these never worked and must be declared invalid.  */
                   5253: 
                   5254:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   5255:     {
                   5256:       rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
                   5257:       rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
                   5258:       rtx new = canon_reg (src, insn);
                   5259: 
                   5260:       if (GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (src) == REG
                   5261:          && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   5262:              != (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
                   5263:        validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new, 0);
                   5264:       else
                   5265:        SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = new;
                   5266: 
                   5267:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
                   5268:        {
                   5269:          validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
                   5270:                           canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 0);
                   5271:          validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
                   5272:                           canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 0);
                   5273:        }
                   5274: 
                   5275:       while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
                   5276:             || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5277:             || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
                   5278:        dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
                   5279: 
                   5280:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
                   5281:        canon_reg (dest, insn);
                   5282:     }
                   5283: 
                   5284:   /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
                   5285:      Detect assignments from or to volatile things
                   5286:      and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
                   5287:      in the rest of this function.
                   5288: 
                   5289:      Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains.  */
                   5290: 
                   5291:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   5292:     {
                   5293:       register rtx src, dest;
                   5294:       register rtx src_folded;
                   5295:       register struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
                   5296:       enum machine_mode mode;
                   5297:       rtx src_eqv_here;
                   5298:       rtx src_const = 0;
                   5299:       rtx src_related = 0;
                   5300:       struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
                   5301:       int src_cost = 10000, src_eqv_cost = 10000, src_folded_cost = 10000;
                   5302:       int src_related_cost = 10000, src_elt_cost = 10000;
                   5303:       /* Set non-zero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
                   5304:         contents of src_folded before using it.  */
                   5305:       int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
                   5306: 
                   5307:       dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
                   5308:       src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
                   5309: 
                   5310:       /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
                   5311:         hash it with the destination's machine mode.
                   5312:         This way we can keep different modes separate.  */
                   5313: 
                   5314:       mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
                   5315:       sets[i].mode = mode;
                   5316: 
                   5317:       if (src_eqv)
                   5318:        {
                   5319:          enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
                   5320:          if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   5321:            eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
                   5322:          do_not_record = 0;
                   5323:          hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   5324:          hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   5325:          src_eqv = fold_rtx (src_eqv, insn);
                   5326:          src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
                   5327: 
                   5328:          /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression.  */
                   5329: 
                   5330:          if (!do_not_record)
                   5331:            src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
                   5332: 
                   5333:          src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
                   5334:          src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   5335:          src_eqv_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   5336:        }
                   5337: 
                   5338:       /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
                   5339:         value of the INNER register, not the destination.  So it is not
                   5340:         a legal substitution for the source.  But save it for later.  */
                   5341:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   5342:        src_eqv_here = 0;
                   5343:       else
                   5344:        src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
                   5345: 
                   5346:       /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC.  Then get the fully-
                   5347:         simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid.  */
                   5348:       src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
                   5349: 
                   5350:       /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
                   5351:         so we will be able to record it later.  */
                   5352:       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5353:          || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
                   5354:        {
                   5355:          rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
                   5356: 
                   5357:          if (GET_CODE (src) == CONST_INT
                   5358:              && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
                   5359:              && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   5360:              && (INTVAL (src) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
                   5361:            src_folded = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   5362:                                  INTVAL (src) & ((1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
                   5363:        }
                   5364: 
                   5365:       /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
                   5366:         should not be recorded at all.  In that case,
                   5367:         prevent any further processing of this assignment.  */
                   5368:       do_not_record = 0;
                   5369:       hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   5370:       hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   5371: 
                   5372:       sets[i].src = src;
                   5373:       sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
                   5374:       sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
                   5375:       sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   5376:       sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   5377: 
                   5378:       /* If source is a perverse subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
                   5379:         treat it as volatile.  It may do the work of an SI in one context
                   5380:         where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
                   5381:         in general.  */
                   5382:       if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
                   5383:          && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
                   5384:              > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
                   5385:        sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
                   5386: 
                   5387:       /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC.  Try to replace
                   5388:          SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
                   5389: 
                   5390:          We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
                   5391:          version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
                   5392:         to a constant.
                   5393: 
                   5394:          Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
                   5395:          of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
                   5396:          the same class; we check for this).
                   5397: 
                   5398:         If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
                   5399: 
                   5400:          We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
                   5401:          REG_NOTE.  */
                   5402: 
                   5403:       if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
                   5404:        elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
                   5405: 
                   5406:       sets[i].src_elt = elt;
                   5407: 
                   5408:       if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
                   5409:         {
                   5410:           if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
                   5411:            {
                   5412:              /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
                   5413:                 classes are now equivalent.  So merge them.  */
                   5414:              merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
                   5415:              src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
                   5416:              src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, elt->mode);
                   5417:            }
                   5418: 
                   5419:           src_eqv_here = 0;
                   5420:         }
                   5421: 
                   5422:       else if (src_eqv_elt)
                   5423:         elt = src_eqv_elt;
                   5424: 
                   5425:       /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
                   5426:         Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'.  Look in
                   5427:         any known equivalences first.  (If the constant is not in the
                   5428:         table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash_code').  */
                   5429:       if (elt)
                   5430:         for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   5431:          if (p->is_const)
                   5432:            {
                   5433:              src_const = p->exp;
                   5434:              src_const_elt = elt;
                   5435:              break;
                   5436:            }
                   5437: 
                   5438:       if (src_const == 0
                   5439:          && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
                   5440:              /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as 
                   5441:                 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
                   5442:                 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used.  */
                   5443:              || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
                   5444:                  && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
                   5445:                  && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
                   5446:        src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
                   5447:       else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
                   5448:        src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
                   5449: 
                   5450:       /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
                   5451:         hash code and look it up.  */
                   5452:       if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
                   5453:        {
                   5454:          sets[i].src_const_hash_code = HASH (src_const, mode);
                   5455:          src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash_code,
                   5456:                                  mode);
                   5457:        }
                   5458: 
                   5459:       sets[i].src_const = src_const;
                   5460:       sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
                   5461: 
                   5462:       /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
                   5463:         equivalent.  Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
                   5464:         isn't, set ELT to it.  */
                   5465:       if (src_const_elt && elt
                   5466:          && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
                   5467:        merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
                   5468:       else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
                   5469:        elt = src_const_elt;
                   5470: 
                   5471:       /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
                   5472:          equivalent of SRC.  */
                   5473:       if (src_const
                   5474:          && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
                   5475:              || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
                   5476:         {
                   5477:           src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
                   5478:           if (src_related)
                   5479:             {
                   5480:              struct table_elt *src_related_elt
                   5481:                    = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
                   5482:              if (src_related_elt && elt)
                   5483:                {
                   5484:                  if (elt->first_same_value
                   5485:                      != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
                   5486:                    /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST 
                   5487:                       involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
                   5488:                       twice.  Merge the involved classes.  */
                   5489:                    merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
                   5490: 
                   5491:                  src_related = 0;
                   5492:                  src_related_elt = 0;
                   5493:                }
                   5494:               else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
                   5495:                elt = src_related_elt;
                   5496:            }
                   5497:         }
                   5498: 
                   5499:       if (src == src_folded)
                   5500:         src_folded = 0;
                   5501: 
                   5502:       /* At this point, ELT, if non-zero, points to a class of expressions
                   5503:          equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
                   5504:         and SRC_RELATED, if non-zero, each contain additional equivalent
                   5505:         expressions.  Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
                   5506:         already in the equivalence class.
                   5507: 
                   5508:         Check for an equivalent identical to the destination.  If found,
                   5509:         this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
                   5510:         elimination of the insn.  Indicate this by placing it in
                   5511:         `src_related'.  */
                   5512: 
                   5513:       if (elt) elt = elt->first_same_value;
                   5514:       for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
                   5515:         {
                   5516:          enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
                   5517: 
                   5518:          /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it.  Then we do not
                   5519:             have to check for validity below.  In most cases, we can use
                   5520:             `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done.  */
                   5521:          if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
                   5522:            continue;
                   5523: 
                   5524:           if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
                   5525:            src = 0;
                   5526:           else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
                   5527:                   && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
                   5528:            src_folded = 0;
                   5529:           else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
                   5530:                   && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
                   5531:            src_eqv_here = 0;
                   5532:           else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
                   5533:                   && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
                   5534:            src_related = 0;
                   5535: 
                   5536:          /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
                   5537:             to prefer it.  Copy it to src_related.  The code below will
                   5538:             then give it a negative cost.  */
                   5539:          if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
                   5540:            src_related = dest;
                   5541: 
                   5542:         }
                   5543: 
                   5544:       /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
                   5545:          possibilities.  Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
                   5546:          that are when they are equal cost.  Note that we can never
                   5547:          worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
                   5548:         If we find an equivalent identical to the source, use it as best,
                   5549:         since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
                   5550:       if (src)
                   5551:        {
                   5552:          if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
                   5553:            src_cost = -1;
                   5554:          else
                   5555:            src_cost = COST (src);
                   5556:        }
                   5557: 
                   5558:       if (src_eqv_here)
                   5559:        {
                   5560:          if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
                   5561:            src_eqv_cost = -1;
                   5562:          else
                   5563:            src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
                   5564:        }
                   5565: 
                   5566:       if (src_folded)
                   5567:        {
                   5568:          if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
                   5569:            src_folded_cost = -1;
                   5570:          else
                   5571:            src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
                   5572:        }
                   5573: 
                   5574:       if (src_related)
                   5575:        {
                   5576:          if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
                   5577:            src_related_cost = -1;
                   5578:          else
                   5579:            src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
                   5580:        }
                   5581: 
                   5582:       /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
                   5583:         cheaper even though it looks more expensive.  */
                   5584:       if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
                   5585:        src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = -1;
                   5586:          
                   5587:       /* Terminate loop when replacement made.  This must terminate since
                   5588:          the current contents will be tested and will always be valid.  */
                   5589:       while (1)
                   5590:         {
                   5591:           rtx trial;
                   5592: 
                   5593:           /* Skip invalid entries.  */
                   5594:           while (elt && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
                   5595:                 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
                   5596:            elt = elt->next_same_value;      
                   5597:              
                   5598:           if (elt) src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
                   5599: 
                   5600:           /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time.   For items
                   5601:             of equal cost, use this order:
                   5602:             src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry.  */
                   5603:           if (src_folded_cost <= src_cost
                   5604:              && src_folded_cost <= src_eqv_cost
                   5605:              && src_folded_cost <= src_related_cost
                   5606:              && src_folded_cost <= src_elt_cost)
                   5607:            {
                   5608:              trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = 10000;
                   5609:              if (src_folded_force_flag)
                   5610:                trial = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
                   5611:            }
                   5612:           else if (src_cost <= src_eqv_cost
                   5613:                   && src_cost <= src_related_cost
                   5614:                   && src_cost <= src_elt_cost)
                   5615:            trial = src, src_cost = 10000;
                   5616:           else if (src_eqv_cost <= src_related_cost
                   5617:                   && src_eqv_cost <= src_elt_cost)
                   5618:            trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = 10000;
                   5619:           else if (src_related_cost <= src_elt_cost)
                   5620:            trial = src_related, src_related_cost = 10000;
                   5621:           else
                   5622:            {
                   5623:              trial = canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), 0);
                   5624:              elt = elt->next_same_value;
                   5625:              src_elt_cost = 10000;
                   5626:            }
                   5627: 
                   5628:          /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
                   5629:             check for this separately here.  We will delete such an
                   5630:             insn below.
                   5631: 
                   5632:             Tablejump insns contain a USE of the table, so simply replacing
                   5633:             the operand with the constant won't match.  This is simply an
                   5634:             unconditional branch, however, and is therefore valid.  Just
                   5635:             insert the substitution here and we will delete and re-emit
                   5636:             the insn later.  */
                   5637: 
                   5638:          if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
                   5639:              && (trial == pc_rtx
                   5640:                  || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
                   5641:                      && ! condjump_p (insn))))
                   5642:            {
                   5643:              /* If TRIAL is a label in front of a jump table, we are
                   5644:                 really falling through the switch (this is how casesi
                   5645:                 insns work), so we must branch around the table.  */
                   5646:              if (GET_CODE (trial) == CODE_LABEL
                   5647:                  && NEXT_INSN (trial) != 0
                   5648:                  && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (trial)) == JUMP_INSN
                   5649:                  && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
                   5650:                      || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_VEC))
                   5651: 
                   5652:                trial = gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, get_label_after (trial));
                   5653: 
                   5654:              SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
                   5655:              break;
                   5656:            }
                   5657:           
                   5658:          /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn.  */
                   5659:           else if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
                   5660:            break;
                   5661: 
                   5662:          /* If we previously found constant pool entries for 
                   5663:             constants and this is a constant, try making a
                   5664:             pool entry.  Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
                   5665:             this since that is where it likely came from.  */
                   5666: 
                   5667:          else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
                   5668:                   && CONSTANT_P (trial)
                   5669:                   && (src_folded == 0 || GET_CODE (src_folded) != MEM)
                   5670:                   && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
                   5671:            {
                   5672:              src_folded_force_flag = 1;
                   5673:              src_folded = trial;
                   5674:              src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
                   5675:            }
                   5676:         }
                   5677: 
                   5678:       src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
                   5679: 
                   5680:       /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
                   5681:         However, there is an important exception:  If both are registers
                   5682:         that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
                   5683:         with the head of the class.  If we do not do this, we will have
                   5684:         both registers live over a portion of the basic block.  This way,
                   5685:         their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping.  */
                   5686:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG
                   5687:          && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
                   5688:          && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == GET_MODE (dest)
                   5689:          && qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] != REGNO (dest)
                   5690:          && GET_CODE (src) == REG && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
                   5691:          /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
                   5692:             SET_SRC.  */
                   5693:          && (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) != REG
                   5694:              || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   5695:        /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
                   5696:           SRC is a hard register.  */
                   5697:        {
                   5698:          int first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (src)]];
                   5699: 
                   5700:          src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl)
                   5701:            = first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
                   5702:              : gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (src), first);
                   5703: 
                   5704:          /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
                   5705:             setting SRC to, use that constant.  We ignored it when we
                   5706:             thought we could make this into a no-op.  */
                   5707:          if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
                   5708:              && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_const, 0))
                   5709:            src = src_const;
                   5710:        }
                   5711: 
                   5712:       /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values.  */
                   5713:       if (src != sets[i].src)
                   5714:         {
                   5715:           do_not_record = 0;
                   5716:           hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
                   5717:           hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
                   5718:          sets[i].src = src;
                   5719:           sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
                   5720:           sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
                   5721:           sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
                   5722:           sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
                   5723:           sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
                   5724:         }
                   5725: 
                   5726:       /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
                   5727:         equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE.   We don't want
                   5728:         to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
                   5729:         that psuedo hasn't been eliminated is a pain.  Such a note also
                   5730:         won't help anything.  */
                   5731:       if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && GET_CODE (dest) == REG
                   5732:          && GET_CODE (src_const) != REG)
                   5733:        {
                   5734:          rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
                   5735:          
                   5736:          /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note, making
                   5737:             a new one if one does not already exist.  */
                   5738:          if (tem)
                   5739:            XEXP (tem, 0) = src_const;
                   5740:          else
                   5741:            REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_EQUAL,
                   5742:                                        src_const, REG_NOTES (insn));
                   5743: 
                   5744:           /* If storing a constant value in a register that
                   5745:             previously held the constant value 0,
                   5746:             record this fact with a REG_WAS_0 note on this insn.
                   5747: 
                   5748:             Note that the *register* is required to have previously held 0,
                   5749:             not just any register in the quantity and we must point to the
                   5750:             insn that set that register to zero.
                   5751: 
                   5752:             Rather than track each register individually, we just see if
                   5753:             the last set for this quantity was for this register.  */
                   5754: 
                   5755:          if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
                   5756:              && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == const0_rtx)
                   5757:            {
                   5758:              /* See if we previously had a REG_WAS_0 note.  */
                   5759:              rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
                   5760:              rtx const_insn = qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]];
                   5761: 
                   5762:              if ((tem = single_set (const_insn)) != 0
                   5763:                  && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (tem), dest))
                   5764:                {
                   5765:                  if (note)
                   5766:                    XEXP (note, 0) = const_insn;
                   5767:                  else
                   5768:                    REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, REG_WAS_0,
                   5769:                                                const_insn, REG_NOTES (insn));
                   5770:                }
                   5771:            }
                   5772:        }
                   5773: 
                   5774:       /* Now deal with the destination.  */
                   5775:       do_not_record = 0;
                   5776:       sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
                   5777: 
                   5778:       /* Look within any SIGN_EXTRACT or ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5779:         to the MEM or REG within it.  */
                   5780:       while (GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
                   5781:             || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5782:             || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
                   5783:             || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   5784:        {
                   5785:          sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &XEXP (dest, 0);
                   5786:          dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
                   5787:        }
                   5788: 
                   5789:       sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
                   5790: 
                   5791:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
                   5792:        {
                   5793:          dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
                   5794: 
                   5795:          /* Decide whether we invalidate everything in memory,
                   5796:             or just things at non-fixed places.
                   5797:             Writing a large aggregate must invalidate everything
                   5798:             because we don't know how long it is.  */
                   5799:          note_mem_written (dest, &writes_memory);
                   5800:        }
                   5801: 
                   5802:       /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
                   5803:         before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
                   5804:         since the register values used in the address computation
                   5805:         are those before this instruction.  */
                   5806:       sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, mode);
                   5807: 
                   5808:       /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
                   5809:         because the value in it after the store
                   5810:         may not equal what was stored, due to truncation.  */
                   5811: 
                   5812:       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
                   5813:          || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
                   5814:        {
                   5815:          rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
                   5816: 
                   5817:          if (src_const != 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
                   5818:              && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
                   5819:              && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   5820:              && ! (INTVAL (src_const) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
                   5821:            /* Exception: if the value is constant,
                   5822:               and it won't be truncated, record it.  */
                   5823:            ;
                   5824:          else
                   5825:            {
                   5826:              /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
                   5827:                 but no new value will be recorded.
                   5828:                 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
                   5829:                 values can be recorded for bitfields.  */
                   5830:              sets[i].src_elt = 0;
                   5831:              sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
                   5832:              src_eqv = 0;
                   5833:              src_eqv_elt = 0;
                   5834:            }
                   5835:        }
                   5836: 
                   5837:       /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
                   5838:         the insn.  */
                   5839:       else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
                   5840:        {
                   5841:          PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
                   5842:          NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
                   5843:          NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
                   5844:          cse_jumps_altered = 1;
                   5845:          /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to.  */
                   5846:          --LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (insn));
                   5847:          /* No more processing for this set.  */
                   5848:          sets[i].rtl = 0;
                   5849:        }
                   5850: 
                   5851:       /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
                   5852:         be a conditional or computed branch.  So we see if we can follow
                   5853:         it.  If it was a computed branch, delete it and re-emit.  */
                   5854:       else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF)
                   5855:        {
                   5856:          rtx p;
                   5857: 
                   5858:          /* If this is not in the format for a simple branch and
                   5859:             we are the only SET in it, re-emit it.  */
                   5860:          if (! simplejump_p (insn) && n_sets == 1)
                   5861:            {
                   5862:              rtx new = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
                   5863:              JUMP_LABEL (new) = XEXP (src, 0);
                   5864:              LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
                   5865:              delete_insn (insn);
                   5866:              insn = new;
                   5867:            }
                   5868: 
                   5869:          /* Now that we've converted this jump to an unconditional jump,
                   5870:             there is dead code after it.  Delete the dead code until we
                   5871:             reach a BARRIER, the end of the function, or a label.  Do
                   5872:             not delete NOTEs except for NOTE_INSN_DELETED since later
                   5873:             phases assume these notes are retained.  */
                   5874: 
                   5875:          p = insn;
                   5876: 
                   5877:          while (NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
                   5878:                 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != BARRIER
                   5879:                 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != CODE_LABEL)
                   5880:            {
                   5881:              if (GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != NOTE
                   5882:                  || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (NEXT_INSN (p)) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)
                   5883:                delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
                   5884:              else
                   5885:                p = NEXT_INSN (p);
                   5886:            }
                   5887: 
                   5888:          /* If we don't have a BARRIER immediately after INSN, put one there.
                   5889:             Much code assumes that there are no NOTEs between a JUMP_INSN and
                   5890:             BARRIER.  */
                   5891: 
                   5892:          if (NEXT_INSN (insn) == 0
                   5893:              || GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (insn)) != BARRIER)
                   5894:            emit_barrier_after (insn);
                   5895: 
                   5896:          /* We might have two BARRIERs separated by notes.  Delete the second
                   5897:             one if so.  */
                   5898: 
                   5899:          if (p != insn && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) == BARRIER)
                   5900:            delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
                   5901: 
                   5902:          cse_jumps_altered = 1;
                   5903:          sets[i].rtl = 0;
                   5904:        }
                   5905: 
                   5906:       /* No further processing for this assignment if destination
                   5907:         is volatile.  */
                   5908: 
                   5909:       else if (do_not_record)
                   5910:        sets[i].rtl = 0;
                   5911: 
                   5912:       if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
                   5913:        sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
                   5914: 
                   5915: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   5916:       /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
                   5917:         is equivalent to a constant.  If it is being set to a floating-point
                   5918:         value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0.  If we
                   5919:         don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
                   5920:         const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
                   5921:         insn as a floating-point operand.  */
                   5922:       if (dest == cc0_rtx)
                   5923:        {
                   5924:          this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
                   5925:          this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
                   5926:          if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   5927:            this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx (COMPARE, VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
                   5928:                                     CONST0_RTX (mode));
                   5929:        }
                   5930: #endif
                   5931:     }
                   5932: 
                   5933:   /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
                   5934:      if they are not already present.
                   5935:      Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
                   5936:      This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
                   5937:      the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
                   5938:      (having been invalidated).  */
                   5939: 
                   5940:   if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
                   5941:       && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
                   5942:     {
                   5943:       register struct table_elt *elt;
                   5944:       register struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
                   5945:       rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
                   5946:       enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
                   5947: 
                   5948:       if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   5949:        {
                   5950:          eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
                   5951:          classp = 0;
                   5952:        }
                   5953:       if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
                   5954:        src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
                   5955:       elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
                   5956:       elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
                   5957:       elt->in_struct = src_eqv_in_struct;
                   5958:       src_eqv_elt = elt;
                   5959:     }
                   5960: 
                   5961:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   5962:     if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
                   5963:        && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
                   5964:       {
                   5965:        if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   5966:          {
                   5967:            /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
                   5968:               gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
                   5969:               not just for the subreg being stored in now.
                   5970:               This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
                   5971:               to treat the entire reg as the destination.  */
                   5972:            sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
                   5973:            sets[i].src_hash_code = src_eqv_hash_code;
                   5974:          }
                   5975:        else
                   5976:          {
                   5977:            /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
                   5978:               already present.  */
                   5979:            register struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
                   5980:            register rtx src = sets[i].src;
                   5981:            register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
                   5982:            enum machine_mode mode
                   5983:              = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
                   5984: 
                   5985:            if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
                   5986:              {
                   5987:                register struct table_elt *elt;
                   5988: 
                   5989:                /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
                   5990:                   any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
                   5991:                   match if not still valid.  */
                   5992:                if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
                   5993:                  sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
                   5994:                elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
                   5995:                elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
                   5996:                elt->in_struct = sets[i].src_in_struct;
                   5997:                sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
                   5998:              }
                   5999: 
                   6000:            if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
                   6001:                && src != sets[i].src_const
                   6002:                && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
                   6003:              sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
                   6004:                                        sets[i].src_const_hash_code, mode);
                   6005:          }
                   6006:       }
                   6007:     else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
                   6008:       /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
                   6009:         volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
                   6010:         so that the destination goes into that class.  */
                   6011:       sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
                   6012: 
                   6013:   invalidate_from_clobbers (&writes_memory, x);
                   6014:   /* Memory, and some registers, are invalidate by subroutine calls.  */
                   6015:   if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
                   6016:     {
                   6017:       static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
                   6018:       invalidate_memory (&everything);
                   6019:       invalidate_for_call ();
                   6020:     }
                   6021: 
                   6022:   /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
                   6023:      If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
                   6024:      sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
                   6025:      a part of which is being set.  */
                   6026: 
                   6027:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   6028:     if (sets[i].rtl)
                   6029:       {
                   6030:        register rtx dest = sets[i].inner_dest;
                   6031: 
                   6032:        /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
                   6033:           previous quantity's chain.
                   6034:           Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
                   6035:           we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those.  */
                   6036:        if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
                   6037:            || (! writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
                   6038:          invalidate (dest);
                   6039:       }
                   6040: 
                   6041:   /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
                   6042:      are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
                   6043:      This removes from the hash table
                   6044:      any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
                   6045: 
                   6046:      We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
                   6047:      we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally.  */
                   6048: 
                   6049:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   6050:     if (sets[i].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) != REG)
                   6051:       mention_regs (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
                   6052: 
                   6053:   /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
                   6054:      So replace each one with the current head of the same class.  */
                   6055: 
                   6056:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   6057:     if (sets[i].rtl)
                   6058:       {
                   6059:        if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
                   6060:          /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
                   6061:             or 0 if nothing remains of that class.  */
                   6062:          {
                   6063:            register struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
                   6064: 
                   6065:            while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
                   6066:              elt = elt->prev_same_value;
                   6067: 
                   6068:            while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
                   6069:              elt = elt->next_same_value;
                   6070:            sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
                   6071:          }
                   6072:       }
                   6073: 
                   6074:   /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes.  */
                   6075: 
                   6076:   for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
                   6077:     if (sets[i].rtl)
                   6078:       {
                   6079:        register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
                   6080:        register struct table_elt *elt;
                   6081: 
                   6082:        /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
                   6083:           floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
                   6084:           memory.  */
                   6085:        if ((flag_float_store
                   6086:             && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
                   6087:             && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (dest)) == MODE_FLOAT)
                   6088:            /* Don't record values of destinations set inside a libcall block
                   6089:               since we might delete the libcall.  Things should have been set
                   6090:               up so we won't want to reuse such a value, but we play it safe
                   6091:               here.  */
                   6092:            || in_libcall_block
                   6093:            /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
                   6094:               table, there is no point is recording DEST.  */
                   6095:             || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
                   6096:          continue;
                   6097: 
                   6098:        /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
                   6099:           and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
                   6100:           Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT.  */
                   6101:        if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
                   6102:          dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
                   6103: 
                   6104:        if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG)
                   6105:          /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities.  */
                   6106:          if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
                   6107:            /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
                   6108:               recalculated.  */
                   6109:            sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
                   6110: 
                   6111:        elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
                   6112:                      sets[i].dest_hash_code, GET_MODE (dest));
                   6113:        elt->in_memory = GET_CODE (sets[i].inner_dest) == MEM;
                   6114:        if (elt->in_memory)
                   6115:          {
                   6116:            /* This implicitly assumes a whole struct
                   6117:               need not have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.
                   6118:               But a whole struct is *supposed* to have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.  */
                   6119:            elt->in_struct = (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
                   6120:                              || sets[i].inner_dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
                   6121:          }
                   6122: 
                   6123:        /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is wider
                   6124:           than M2, and both M1 and M2 are a single word, we are also doing
                   6125:           (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1 0))) so make that equivalence
                   6126:           as well.
                   6127: 
                   6128:           However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart_if_possible
                   6129:           will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart_if_possible applied to
                   6130:           BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
                   6131:           BAR's equivalences.  If we don't get a simplified form, make 
                   6132:           the SUBREG.  It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
                   6133:           cause two similar assignments to be detected.
                   6134: 
                   6135:           Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
                   6136:           already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table.  */
                   6137: 
                   6138:        if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
                   6139:            && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
                   6140:            && GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) <= UNITS_PER_WORD
                   6141:            && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
                   6142:                >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
                   6143:            && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
                   6144:          {
                   6145:            enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
                   6146:            struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
                   6147: 
                   6148:            for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
                   6149:                 elt = elt->next_same_value)
                   6150:              {
                   6151:                rtx new_src = 0;
                   6152:                int src_hash;
                   6153:                struct table_elt *src_elt;
                   6154: 
                   6155:                /* Ignore invalid entries.  */
                   6156:                if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
                   6157:                    && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
                   6158:                  continue;
                   6159: 
                   6160:                new_src = gen_lowpart_if_possible (new_mode, elt->exp);
                   6161:                if (new_src == 0)
                   6162:                  new_src = gen_rtx (SUBREG, new_mode, elt->exp, 0);
                   6163: 
                   6164:                src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
                   6165:                src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
                   6166: 
                   6167:                /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
                   6168:                   already.  */
                   6169:                if (src_elt == 0)
                   6170:                  {
                   6171:                    if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
                   6172:                      src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
                   6173:                    src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
                   6174:                    src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
                   6175:                    src_elt->in_struct = elt->in_struct;
                   6176:                  }
                   6177:                else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
                   6178:                  /* Show that two things that we've seen before are 
                   6179:                     actually the same.  */
                   6180:                  merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
                   6181: 
                   6182:                classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
                   6183:              }
                   6184:          }
                   6185:       }
                   6186: 
                   6187:   /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1)
                   6188:      where REG0 is the "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.
                   6189:      After cse, REG1 will probably not be used in the sequel, 
                   6190:      so (if easily done) change this insn to (set REG1 REG0) and
                   6191:      replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn that computed their value.
                   6192:      Then REG1 will become a dead store and won't cloud the situation
                   6193:      for later optimizations.
                   6194: 
                   6195:      Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
                   6196:      then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
                   6197:      into a three-operand insn.
                   6198: 
                   6199:      Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN.  */
                   6200: 
                   6201:   if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
                   6202:       && NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
                   6203:       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
                   6204:       && REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   6205:       && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
                   6206:       && (qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))]]
                   6207:          == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))))
                   6208:     {
                   6209:       rtx prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
                   6210:       while (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == NOTE)
                   6211:        prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
                   6212: 
                   6213:       if (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
                   6214:          && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
                   6215:        {
                   6216:          rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
                   6217:          rtx note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, 0);
                   6218: 
                   6219:          validate_change (prev, & SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
                   6220:          validate_change (insn, & SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl),
                   6221:                           SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), 1);
                   6222:          validate_change (insn, & SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
                   6223:          apply_change_group ();
                   6224: 
                   6225:          /* If REG1 was equivalent to a constant, REG0 is not.  */
                   6226:          if (note)
                   6227:            PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_EQUAL);
                   6228: 
                   6229:          /* If there was a REG_WAS_0 note on PREV, remove it.  Move
                   6230:             any REG_WAS_0 note on INSN to PREV.  */
                   6231:          note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_WAS_0, 0);
                   6232:          if (note)
                   6233:            remove_note (prev, note);
                   6234: 
                   6235:          note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
                   6236:          if (note)
                   6237:            {
                   6238:              remove_note (insn, note);
                   6239:              XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (prev);
                   6240:              REG_NOTES (prev) = note;
                   6241:            }
                   6242:        }
                   6243:     }
                   6244: 
                   6245:   /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known equivalences due to
                   6246:      the condition being tested.  */
                   6247: 
                   6248:   last_jump_equiv_class = 0;
                   6249:   if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN
                   6250:       && n_sets == 1 && GET_CODE (x) == SET
                   6251:       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE)
                   6252:     record_jump_equiv (insn, 0);
                   6253: 
                   6254: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   6255:   /* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer references CC0,
                   6256:      delete the previous insn.  Here we use the fact that nothing expects CC0
                   6257:      to be valid over an insn, which is true until the final pass.  */
                   6258:   if (prev_insn && GET_CODE (prev_insn) == INSN
                   6259:       && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
                   6260:       && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
                   6261:       && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, x))
                   6262:     {
                   6263:       PUT_CODE (prev_insn, NOTE);
                   6264:       NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (prev_insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
                   6265:       NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (prev_insn) = 0;
                   6266:     }
                   6267: 
                   6268:   prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
                   6269:   prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
                   6270: #endif
                   6271: 
                   6272:   prev_insn = insn;
                   6273: }
                   6274: 
                   6275: /* Store 1 in *WRITES_PTR for those categories of memory ref
                   6276:    that must be invalidated when the expression WRITTEN is stored in.
                   6277:    If WRITTEN is null, say everything must be invalidated.  */
                   6278: 
                   6279: static void
                   6280: note_mem_written (written, writes_ptr)
                   6281:      rtx written;
                   6282:      struct write_data *writes_ptr;
                   6283: {
                   6284:   static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
                   6285: 
                   6286:   if (written == 0)
                   6287:     *writes_ptr = everything;
                   6288:   else if (GET_CODE (written) == MEM)
                   6289:     {
                   6290:       /* Pushing or popping the stack invalidates just the stack pointer. */
                   6291:       rtx addr = XEXP (written, 0);
                   6292:       if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
                   6293:           || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
                   6294:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
                   6295:          && REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
                   6296:        {
                   6297:          writes_ptr->sp = 1;
                   6298:          return;
                   6299:        }
                   6300:       else if (GET_MODE (written) == BLKmode)
                   6301:        *writes_ptr = everything;
                   6302:       else if (cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (written))
                   6303:        {
                   6304:          /* A varying address that is a sum indicates an array element,
                   6305:             and that's just as good as a structure element
                   6306:             in implying that we need not invalidate scalar variables.  */
                   6307:          if (!(MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (written)
                   6308:                || GET_CODE (XEXP (written, 0)) == PLUS))
                   6309:            writes_ptr->all = 1;
                   6310:          writes_ptr->nonscalar = 1;
                   6311:        }
                   6312:       writes_ptr->var = 1;
                   6313:     }
                   6314: }
                   6315: 
                   6316: /* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
                   6317:    except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
                   6318:    This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
                   6319:    alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
                   6320: 
                   6321:    W points to the writes_memory for this insn, a struct write_data
                   6322:    saying which kinds of memory references must be invalidated.
                   6323:    X is the pattern of the insn.  */
                   6324: 
                   6325: static void
                   6326: invalidate_from_clobbers (w, x)
                   6327:      struct write_data *w;
                   6328:      rtx x;
                   6329: {
                   6330:   /* If W->var is not set, W specifies no action.
                   6331:      If W->all is set, this step gets all memory refs
                   6332:      so they can be ignored in the rest of this function.  */
                   6333:   if (w->var)
                   6334:     invalidate_memory (w);
                   6335: 
                   6336:   if (w->sp)
                   6337:     {
                   6338:       if (reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM] >= 0)
                   6339:        reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM]++;
                   6340: 
                   6341:       /* This should be *very* rare.  */
                   6342:       if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM))
                   6343:        invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx);
                   6344:     }
                   6345: 
                   6346:   if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
                   6347:     {
                   6348:       rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
                   6349:       if (ref
                   6350:          && (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
                   6351:              || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && ! w->all)))
                   6352:        invalidate (ref);
                   6353:     }
                   6354:   else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
                   6355:     {
                   6356:       register int i;
                   6357:       for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   6358:        {
                   6359:          register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
                   6360:          if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
                   6361:            {
                   6362:              rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
                   6363:              if (ref
                   6364:                  &&(GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
                   6365:                     || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && !w->all)))
                   6366:                invalidate (ref);
                   6367:            }
                   6368:        }
                   6369:     }
                   6370: }
                   6371: 
                   6372: /* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn.  Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
                   6373:    and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
                   6374:    or the canonical form of the register.  If we are inside an address,
                   6375:    only do this if the address remains valid.
                   6376: 
                   6377:    OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
                   6378: 
                   6379:    Return the replacement for X.  */
                   6380: 
                   6381: static rtx
                   6382: cse_process_notes (x, object)
                   6383:      rtx x;
                   6384:      rtx object;
                   6385: {
                   6386:   enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
                   6387:   char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   6388:   int qty;
                   6389:   int i;
                   6390: 
                   6391:   switch (code)
                   6392:     {
                   6393:     case CONST_INT:
                   6394:     case CONST:
                   6395:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   6396:     case LABEL_REF:
                   6397:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   6398:     case PC:
                   6399:     case CC0:
                   6400:     case LO_SUM:
                   6401:       return x;
                   6402: 
                   6403:     case MEM:
                   6404:       XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x);
                   6405:       return x;
                   6406: 
                   6407:     case EXPR_LIST:
                   6408:     case INSN_LIST:
                   6409:       if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
                   6410:        XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                   6411:       if (XEXP (x, 1))
                   6412:        XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
                   6413:       return x;
                   6414: 
                   6415:     case REG:
                   6416:       i = reg_qty[REGNO (x)];
                   6417: 
                   6418:       /* Return a constant or a constant register.  */
                   6419:       if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
                   6420:          && qty_const[i] != 0
                   6421:          && (CONSTANT_P (qty_const[i])
                   6422:              || GET_CODE (qty_const[i]) == REG))
                   6423:        {
                   6424:          rtx new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[i]);
                   6425:          if (new)
                   6426:            return new;
                   6427:        }
                   6428: 
                   6429:       /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register.  */
                   6430:       return canon_reg (x, 0);
                   6431:     }
                   6432: 
                   6433:   for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
                   6434:     if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   6435:       validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
                   6436:                       cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object), 0);
                   6437: 
                   6438:   return x;
                   6439: }
                   6440: 
                   6441: /* Find common subexpressions between the end test of a loop and the beginning
                   6442:    of the loop.  LOOP_START is the CODE_LABEL at the start of a loop.
                   6443: 
                   6444:    Often we have a loop where an expression in the exit test is used
                   6445:    in the body of the loop.  For example "while (*p) *q++ = *p++;".
                   6446:    Because of the way we duplicate the loop exit test in front of the loop,
                   6447:    however, we don't detect that common subexpression.  This will be caught
                   6448:    when global cse is implemented, but this is a quite common case.
                   6449: 
                   6450:    This function handles the most common cases of these common expressions.
                   6451:    It is called after we have processed the basic block ending with the
                   6452:    NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END note that ends a loop and the previous JUMP_INSN
                   6453:    jumps to a label used only once.  */
                   6454: 
                   6455: static void
                   6456: cse_around_loop (loop_start)
                   6457:      rtx loop_start;
                   6458: {
                   6459:   rtx insn;
                   6460:   int i;
                   6461:   struct table_elt *p;
                   6462: 
                   6463:   /* If the jump at the end of the loop doesn't go to the start, we don't
                   6464:      do anything.  */
                   6465:   for (insn = PREV_INSN (loop_start);
                   6466:        insn && (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) >= 0);
                   6467:        insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
                   6468:     ;
                   6469: 
                   6470:   if (insn == 0
                   6471:       || GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
                   6472:       || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) != NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG)
                   6473:     return;
                   6474: 
                   6475:   /* If the last insn of the loop (the end test) was an NE comparison,
                   6476:      we will interpret it as an EQ comparison, since we fell through
                   6477:      the loop.  Any equivalances resulting from that comparison are
                   6478:      therefore not valid and must be invalidated.  */
                   6479:   if (last_jump_equiv_class)
                   6480:     for (p = last_jump_equiv_class->first_same_value; p;
                   6481:         p = p->next_same_value)
                   6482:       if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == MEM || GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
                   6483:          || GET_CODE (p->exp) == SUBREG)
                   6484:        invalidate (p->exp);
                   6485: 
                   6486:   /* Process insns starting after LOOP_START until we hit a CALL_INSN or
                   6487:      a CODE_LABEL (we could handle a CALL_INSN, but it isn't worth it).
                   6488: 
                   6489:      The only thing we do with SET_DEST is invalidate entries, so we
                   6490:      can safely process each SET in order.  It is slightly less efficient
                   6491:      to do so, but we only want to handle the most common cases.  */
                   6492: 
                   6493:   for (insn = NEXT_INSN (loop_start);
                   6494:        GET_CODE (insn) != CALL_INSN && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL
                   6495:        && ! (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE
                   6496:             && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
                   6497:        insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
                   6498:     {
                   6499:       if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
                   6500:          && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
                   6501:              || GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER))
                   6502:        cse_set_around_loop (PATTERN (insn), insn, loop_start);
                   6503:       else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
                   6504:               && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
                   6505:        for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   6506:          if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET
                   6507:              || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
                   6508:            cse_set_around_loop (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i), insn,
                   6509:                                 loop_start);
                   6510:     }
                   6511: }
                   6512: 
                   6513: /* Used for communication between the following two routines; contains a
                   6514:    value to be checked for modification.  */
                   6515: 
                   6516: static rtx cse_check_loop_start_value;
                   6517: 
                   6518: /* If modifying X will modify the value in CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE,
                   6519:    indicate that fact by setting CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE to 0.  */
                   6520: 
                   6521: static void
                   6522: cse_check_loop_start (x, set)
                   6523:      rtx x;
                   6524:      rtx set;
                   6525: {
                   6526:   if (cse_check_loop_start_value == 0
                   6527:       || GET_CODE (x) == CC0 || GET_CODE (x) == PC)
                   6528:     return;
                   6529: 
                   6530:   if ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (cse_check_loop_start_value) == MEM)
                   6531:       || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, cse_check_loop_start_value))
                   6532:     cse_check_loop_start_value = 0;
                   6533: }
                   6534: 
                   6535: /* X is a SET or CLOBBER contained in INSN that was found near the start of
                   6536:    a loop that starts with the label at LOOP_START.
                   6537: 
                   6538:    If X is a SET, we see if its SET_SRC is currently in our hash table.
                   6539:    If so, we see if it has a value equal to some register used only in the
                   6540:    loop exit code (as marked by jump.c).
                   6541: 
                   6542:    If those two conditions are true, we search backwards from the start of
                   6543:    the loop to see if that same value was loaded into a register that still
                   6544:    retains its value at the start of the loop.
                   6545: 
                   6546:    If so, we insert an insn after the load to copy the destination of that
                   6547:    load into the equivalent register and (try to) replace our SET_SRC with that
                   6548:    register.
                   6549: 
                   6550:    In any event, we invalidate whatever this SET or CLOBBER modifies.  */
                   6551: 
                   6552: static void
                   6553: cse_set_around_loop (x, insn, loop_start)
                   6554:      rtx x;
                   6555:      rtx insn;
                   6556:      rtx loop_start;
                   6557: {
                   6558:   rtx p;
                   6559:   struct table_elt *src_elt;
                   6560:   static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
                   6561:   struct write_data writes_memory;
                   6562: 
                   6563:   writes_memory = init;
                   6564: 
                   6565:   /* If this is a SET, see if we can replace SET_SRC, but ignore SETs that
                   6566:      are setting PC or CC0 or whose SET_SRC is already a register.  */
                   6567:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SET
                   6568:       && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
                   6569:       && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != REG)
                   6570:     {
                   6571:       src_elt = lookup (SET_SRC (x),
                   6572:                        HASH (SET_SRC (x), GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))),
                   6573:                        GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)));
                   6574: 
                   6575:       if (src_elt)
                   6576:        for (src_elt = src_elt->first_same_value; src_elt;
                   6577:             src_elt = src_elt->next_same_value)
                   6578:          if (GET_CODE (src_elt->exp) == REG && REG_LOOP_TEST_P (src_elt->exp)
                   6579:              && COST (src_elt->exp) < COST (SET_SRC (x)))
                   6580:            {
                   6581:              rtx p, set;
                   6582: 
                   6583:              /* Look for an insn in front of LOOP_START that sets
                   6584:                 something in the desired mode to SET_SRC (x) before we hit
                   6585:                 a label or CALL_INSN.  */
                   6586: 
                   6587:              for (p = prev_nonnote_insn (loop_start);
                   6588:                   p && GET_CODE (p) != CALL_INSN
                   6589:                   && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL;
                   6590:                   p = prev_nonnote_insn  (p))
                   6591:                if ((set = single_set (p)) != 0
                   6592:                    && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == REG
                   6593:                    && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == src_elt->mode
                   6594:                    && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (set), SET_SRC (x)))
                   6595:                  {
                   6596:                    /* We now have to ensure that nothing between P
                   6597:                       and LOOP_START modified anything referenced in
                   6598:                       SET_SRC (x).  We know that nothing within the loop
                   6599:                       can modify it, or we would have invalidated it in
                   6600:                       the hash table.  */
                   6601:                    rtx q;
                   6602: 
                   6603:                    cse_check_loop_start_value = SET_SRC (x);
                   6604:                    for (q = p; q != loop_start; q = NEXT_INSN (q))
                   6605:                      if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (q)) == 'i')
                   6606:                        note_stores (PATTERN (q), cse_check_loop_start);
                   6607: 
                   6608:                    /* If nothing was changed and we can replace our
                   6609:                       SET_SRC, add an insn after P to copy its destination
                   6610:                       to what we will be replacing SET_SRC with.  */
                   6611:                    if (cse_check_loop_start_value
                   6612:                        && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (x),
                   6613:                                            src_elt->exp, 0))
                   6614:                      emit_insn_after (gen_move_insn (src_elt->exp,
                   6615:                                                      SET_DEST (set)),
                   6616:                                       p);
                   6617:                    break;
                   6618:                  }
                   6619:            }
                   6620:     }
                   6621: 
                   6622:   /* Now invalidate anything modified by X.  */
                   6623:   note_mem_written (SET_DEST (x), &writes_memory);
                   6624: 
                   6625:   if (writes_memory.var)
                   6626:     invalidate_memory (&writes_memory);
                   6627: 
                   6628:   /* See comment on similar code in cse_insn for explanation of these tests. */
                   6629:   if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
                   6630:       || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == MEM && ! writes_memory.all
                   6631:          && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (SET_DEST (x))))
                   6632:     invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
                   6633: }
                   6634: 
                   6635: /* Find the end of INSN's basic block and return its range,
                   6636:    the total number of SETs in all the insns of the block, the last insn of the
                   6637:    block, and the branch path.
                   6638: 
                   6639:    The branch path indicates which branches should be followed.  If a non-zero
                   6640:    path size is specified, the block should be rescanned and a different set
                   6641:    of branches will be taken.  The branch path is only used if
                   6642:    FLAG_CSE_FOLLOW_JUMPS is non-zero.
                   6643: 
                   6644:    DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, defined below, that is
                   6645:    used to describe the block.  It is filled in with the information about
                   6646:    the current block.  The incoming structure's branch path, if any, is used
                   6647:    to construct the output branch path.  */
                   6648: 
                   6649: /* Define maximum length of a branch path.  */
                   6650: 
                   6651: #define PATHLENGTH     20
                   6652: 
                   6653: struct cse_basic_block_data {
                   6654:   /* Lowest CUID value of insns in block.  */
                   6655:   int low_cuid;
                   6656:   /* Highest CUID value of insns in block.  */
                   6657:   int high_cuid;
                   6658:   /* Total number of SETs in block.  */
                   6659:   int nsets;
                   6660:   /* Last insn in the block.  */
                   6661:   rtx last;
                   6662:   /* Size of current branch path, if any.  */
                   6663:   int path_size;
                   6664:   /* Current branch path, indicating which branches will be taken.  */
                   6665:   struct branch_path {
                   6666:     /* The branch insn. */
                   6667:     rtx branch;
                   6668:     /* Whether it should be taken or not.  */
                   6669:     enum taken {TAKEN, NOT_TAKEN} status;
                   6670:   } path[PATHLENGTH];
                   6671: };
                   6672: 
                   6673: void
                   6674: cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, data, follow_jumps, after_loop)
                   6675:      rtx insn;
                   6676:      struct cse_basic_block_data *data;
                   6677:      int follow_jumps;
                   6678:      int after_loop;
                   6679: {
                   6680:   rtx p = insn, q;
                   6681:   int nsets = 0;
                   6682:   int low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn), high_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn);
                   6683:   int path_size = data->path_size;
                   6684:   int path_entry = 0;
                   6685:   int i;
                   6686: 
                   6687:   /* Update the previous branch path, if any.  If the last branch was
                   6688:      previously TAKEN, mark it NOT_TAKEN.  If it was previously NOT_TAKEN,
                   6689:      shorten the path by one and look at the previous branch.  We know that
                   6690:      at least one branch must have been taken if PATH_SIZE is non-zero.  */
                   6691:   while (path_size > 0)
                   6692:     {
                   6693:       if (data->path[path_size - 1].status == TAKEN)
                   6694:        {
                   6695:          data->path[path_size - 1].status = NOT_TAKEN;
                   6696:          break;
                   6697:        }
                   6698:       else
                   6699:        path_size--;
                   6700:     }
                   6701: 
                   6702:   /* Scan to end of this basic block.  */
                   6703:   while (p && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL)
                   6704:     {
                   6705:       /* Don't cse out the end of a loop.  This makes a difference
                   6706:         only for the unusual loops that always execute at least once;
                   6707:         all other loops have labels there so we will stop in any case.
                   6708:         Cse'ing out the end of the loop is dangerous because it
                   6709:         might cause an invariant expression inside the loop
                   6710:         to be reused after the end of the loop.  This would make it
                   6711:         hard to move the expression out of the loop in loop.c,
                   6712:         especially if it is one of several equivalent expressions
                   6713:         and loop.c would like to eliminate it.
                   6714: 
                   6715:         If we are running after loop.c has finished, we can ignore
                   6716:         the NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END.  */
                   6717: 
                   6718:       if (! after_loop && GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
                   6719:          && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END)
                   6720:        break;
                   6721: 
                   6722:       /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg vax)
                   6723:         the regs restored by the longjmp come from
                   6724:         a later time than the setjmp.  */
                   6725:       if (GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
                   6726:          && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
                   6727:        break;
                   6728: 
                   6729:       /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
                   6730:         especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS.  */
                   6731:       if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i'
                   6732:          && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == PARALLEL)
                   6733:        nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (p), 0);
                   6734:       else if (GET_CODE (p) != NOTE)
                   6735:        nsets += 1;
                   6736:        
                   6737:       if (INSN_CUID (p) > high_cuid)
                   6738:         high_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
                   6739:       if (INSN_CUID (p) < low_cuid)
                   6740:         low_cuid = INSN_CUID(p);
                   6741: 
                   6742:       /* See if this insn is in our branch path.  If it is and we are to
                   6743:         take it, do so.  */
                   6744:       if (path_entry < path_size && data->path[path_entry].branch == p)
                   6745:        {
                   6746:          if (data->path[path_entry].status == TAKEN)
                   6747:            p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
                   6748:          
                   6749:          /* Point to next entry in path, if any.  */
                   6750:          path_entry++;
                   6751:        }
                   6752: 
                   6753:       /* If this is a conditional jump, we can follow it if -fcse-follow-jumps
                   6754:         was specified, we haven't reached our maximum path length, there are
                   6755:         insns following the target of the jump, this is the only use of the
                   6756:         jump label, and the target label is preceeded by a BARRIER.  */
                   6757:       else if (follow_jumps && path_size < PATHLENGTH - 1
                   6758:               && GET_CODE (p) == JUMP_INSN
                   6759:               && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == SET
                   6760:               && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (p))) == IF_THEN_ELSE
                   6761:               && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (p)) == 1
                   6762:               && NEXT_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)) != 0)
                   6763:        {
                   6764:          for (q = PREV_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)); q; q = PREV_INSN (q))
                   6765:            if ((GET_CODE (q) != NOTE
                   6766:                 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
                   6767:                 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
                   6768:                && (GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL || LABEL_NUSES (q) != 0))
                   6769:              break;
                   6770: 
                   6771:          /* If we ran into a BARRIER, this code is an extension of the
                   6772:             basic block when the branch is taken.  */
                   6773:          if (q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) == BARRIER)
                   6774:            {
                   6775:              /* Don't allow ourself to keep walking around an
                   6776:                 always-executed loop.  */
                   6777:              if (next_real_insn (q) == next_real_insn (insn))
                   6778:                break;
                   6779: 
                   6780:              /* Similarly, don't put a branch in our path more than once.  */
                   6781:              for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
                   6782:                if (data->path[i].branch == p)
                   6783:                  break;
                   6784: 
                   6785:              if (i != path_entry)
                   6786:                break;
                   6787: 
                   6788:              data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
                   6789:              data->path[path_entry++].status = TAKEN;
                   6790: 
                   6791:              /* This branch now ends our path.  It was possible that we
                   6792:                 didn't see this branch the last time around (when the
                   6793:                 insn in front of the target was a JUMP_INSN that was
                   6794:                 turned into a no-op).  */
                   6795:              path_size = path_entry;
                   6796: 
                   6797:              p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
                   6798:              /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later.  */
                   6799:              PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
                   6800:            }
                   6801:        }
                   6802:        
                   6803:       p = NEXT_INSN (p);
                   6804:     }
                   6805: 
                   6806:   data->low_cuid = low_cuid;
                   6807:   data->high_cuid = high_cuid;
                   6808:   data->nsets = nsets;
                   6809:   data->last = p;
                   6810: 
                   6811:   /* If all jumps in the path are not taken, set our path length to zero
                   6812:      so a rescan won't be done.  */
                   6813:   for (i = path_size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   6814:     if (data->path[i].status == TAKEN)
                   6815:       break;
                   6816: 
                   6817:   if (i == -1)
                   6818:     data->path_size = 0;
                   6819:   else
                   6820:     data->path_size = path_size;
                   6821: 
                   6822:   /* End the current branch path.  */
                   6823:   data->path[path_size].branch = 0;
                   6824: }
                   6825: 
                   6826: static rtx cse_basic_block ();
                   6827: 
                   6828: /* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
                   6829:    F is the first instruction.
                   6830:    NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
                   6831: 
                   6832:    AFTER_LOOP is 1 if this is the cse call done after loop optimization
                   6833:    (only if -frerun-cse-after-loop).
                   6834: 
                   6835:    Returns 1 if jump_optimize should be redone due to simplifications
                   6836:    in conditional jump instructions.  */
                   6837: 
                   6838: int
                   6839: cse_main (f, nregs, after_loop, file)
                   6840:      rtx f;
                   6841:      int nregs;
                   6842:      int after_loop;
                   6843:      FILE *file;
                   6844: {
                   6845:   struct cse_basic_block_data val;
                   6846:   register rtx insn = f;
                   6847:   register int i;
                   6848: 
                   6849:   cse_jumps_altered = 0;
                   6850:   constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
                   6851:   val.path_size = 0;
                   6852: 
                   6853:   init_recog ();
                   6854: 
                   6855:   max_reg = nregs;
                   6856: 
                   6857:   all_minus_one = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6858:   consec_ints = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6859: 
                   6860:   for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
                   6861:     {
                   6862:       all_minus_one[i] = -1;
                   6863:       consec_ints[i] = i;
                   6864:     }
                   6865: 
                   6866:   reg_next_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6867:   reg_prev_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6868:   reg_qty = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6869:   reg_in_table = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6870:   reg_tick = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
                   6871: 
                   6872:   /* Discard all the free elements of the previous function
                   6873:      since they are allocated in the temporarily obstack.  */
                   6874:   bzero (table, sizeof table);
                   6875:   free_element_chain = 0;
                   6876:   n_elements_made = 0;
                   6877: 
                   6878:   /* Find the largest uid.  */
                   6879: 
                   6880:   i = get_max_uid ();
                   6881:   uid_cuid = (short *) alloca ((i + 1) * sizeof (short));
                   6882:   bzero (uid_cuid, (i + 1) * sizeof (short));
                   6883: 
                   6884:   /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids.
                   6885:      CUIDs are numbers assigned to insns, like uids,
                   6886:      except that cuids increase monotonically through the code.
                   6887:      Don't assign cuids to line-number NOTEs, so that the distance in cuids
                   6888:      between two insns is not affected by -g.  */
                   6889: 
                   6890:   for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
                   6891:     {
                   6892:       if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
                   6893:          || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) < 0)
                   6894:        INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i;
                   6895:       else
                   6896:        /* Give a line number note the same cuid as preceding insn.  */
                   6897:        INSN_CUID (insn) = i;
                   6898:     }
                   6899: 
                   6900:   /* Initialize which registers are clobbered by calls.  */
                   6901: 
                   6902:   CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call);
                   6903: 
                   6904:   for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
                   6905:     if ((call_used_regs[i]
                   6906:         /* Used to check !fixed_regs[i] here, but that isn't safe;
                   6907:            fixed regs are still call-clobbered, and sched can get
                   6908:            confused if they can "live across calls".
                   6909: 
                   6910:            The frame pointer is always preserved across calls.  The arg
                   6911:            pointer is if it is fixed.  The stack pointer usually is, unless
                   6912:            RETURN_POPS_ARGS, in which case an explicit CLOBBER
                   6913:            will be present.  If we are generating PIC code, the PIC offset
                   6914:            table register is preserved across calls.  */
                   6915: 
                   6916:         && i != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
                   6917:         && i != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   6918: #if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
                   6919:         && ! (i == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[i])
                   6920: #endif
                   6921: #ifdef PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
                   6922:         && ! (i == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM && flag_pic)
                   6923: #endif
                   6924:         )
                   6925:        || global_regs[i])
                   6926:       SET_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i);
                   6927: 
                   6928:   /* Loop over basic blocks.
                   6929:      Compute the maximum number of qty's needed for each basic block
                   6930:      (which is 2 for each SET).  */
                   6931:   insn = f;
                   6932:   while (insn)
                   6933:     {
                   6934:       int tem;
                   6935: 
                   6936:       cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, flag_cse_follow_jumps, after_loop);
                   6937: 
                   6938:       /* If this basic block was already processed or has no sets, skip it.  */
                   6939:       if (val.nsets == 0 || GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
                   6940:        {
                   6941:          PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
                   6942:          insn = (val.last ? NEXT_INSN (val.last) : 0);
                   6943:          val.path_size = 0;
                   6944:          continue;
                   6945:        }
                   6946: 
                   6947:       cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
                   6948:       cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
                   6949:       max_qty = val.nsets * 2;
                   6950:       
                   6951:       if (file)
                   6952:        fprintf (file, ";; Processing block from %d to %d, %d sets.\n",
                   6953:                 INSN_UID (insn), val.last ? INSN_UID (val.last) : 0,
                   6954:                 val.nsets);
                   6955: 
                   6956:       /* Make MAX_QTY bigger to give us room to optimize
                   6957:         past the end of this basic block, if that should prove useful.  */
                   6958:       if (max_qty < 500)
                   6959:        max_qty = 500;
                   6960: 
                   6961:       max_qty += max_reg;
                   6962: 
                   6963:       /* If this basic block is being extended by following certain jumps,
                   6964:          (see `cse_end_of_basic_block'), we reprocess the code from the start.
                   6965:          Otherwise, we start after this basic block.  */
                   6966:       if (val.path_size > 0)
                   6967:         cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, 0);
                   6968:       else
                   6969:        {
                   6970:          int old_cse_jumps_altered = cse_jumps_altered;
                   6971:          rtx temp;
                   6972: 
                   6973:          /* When cse changes a conditional jump to an unconditional
                   6974:             jump, we want to reprocess the block, since it will give
                   6975:             us a new branch path to investigate.  */
                   6976:          cse_jumps_altered = 0;
                   6977:          temp = cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, ! after_loop);
                   6978:          if (cse_jumps_altered == 0 || flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0)
                   6979:            insn = temp;
                   6980: 
                   6981:          cse_jumps_altered |= old_cse_jumps_altered;
                   6982:        }
                   6983: 
                   6984: #ifdef USE_C_ALLOCA
                   6985:       alloca (0);
                   6986: #endif
                   6987:     }
                   6988: 
                   6989:   /* Tell refers_to_mem_p that qty_const info is not available.  */
                   6990:   qty_const = 0;
                   6991: 
                   6992:   if (max_elements_made < n_elements_made)
                   6993:     max_elements_made = n_elements_made;
                   6994: 
                   6995:   return cse_jumps_altered;
                   6996: }
                   6997: 
                   6998: /* Process a single basic block.  FROM and TO and the limits of the basic
                   6999:    block.  NEXT_BRANCH points to the branch path when following jumps or
                   7000:    a null path when not following jumps.
                   7001: 
                   7002:    AROUND_LOOP is non-zero if we are to try to cse around to the start of a
                   7003:    loop.  This is true when we are being called for the last time on a
                   7004:    block and this CSE pass is before loop.c.  */
                   7005: 
                   7006: static rtx
                   7007: cse_basic_block (from, to, next_branch, around_loop)
                   7008:      register rtx from, to;
                   7009:      struct branch_path *next_branch;
                   7010:      int around_loop;
                   7011: {
                   7012:   register rtx insn;
                   7013:   int to_usage = 0;
                   7014:   int in_libcall_block = 0;
                   7015: 
                   7016:   /* Each of these arrays is undefined before max_reg, so only allocate
                   7017:      the space actually needed and adjust the start below.  */
                   7018: 
                   7019:   qty_first_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
                   7020:   qty_last_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
                   7021:   qty_mode= (enum machine_mode *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
                   7022:   qty_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
                   7023:   qty_const_insn = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
                   7024:   qty_comparison_code
                   7025:     = (enum rtx_code *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum rtx_code));
                   7026:   qty_comparison_qty = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
                   7027:   qty_comparison_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
                   7028: 
                   7029:   qty_first_reg -= max_reg;
                   7030:   qty_last_reg -= max_reg;
                   7031:   qty_mode -= max_reg;
                   7032:   qty_const -= max_reg;
                   7033:   qty_const_insn -= max_reg;
                   7034:   qty_comparison_code -= max_reg;
                   7035:   qty_comparison_qty -= max_reg;
                   7036:   qty_comparison_const -= max_reg;
                   7037: 
                   7038:   new_basic_block ();
                   7039: 
                   7040:   /* TO might be a label.  If so, protect it from being deleted.  */
                   7041:   if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
                   7042:     ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
                   7043: 
                   7044:   for (insn = from; insn != to; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
                   7045:     {
                   7046:       register enum rtx_code code;
                   7047: 
                   7048:       /* See if this is a branch that is part of the path.  If so, and it is
                   7049:         to be taken, do so.  */
                   7050:       if (next_branch->branch == insn)
                   7051:        {
                   7052:          if (next_branch++->status == TAKEN)
                   7053:            {
                   7054:              record_jump_equiv (insn, 1);
                   7055:              /* Set the last insn as the jump insn; it doesn't affect cc0.
                   7056:                 Then follow this branch.  */
                   7057: #ifdef HAVE_cc0
                   7058:              prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
                   7059: #endif
                   7060:              prev_insn = insn;
                   7061:              insn = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
                   7062:              continue;
                   7063:            }
                   7064:        }
                   7065:         
                   7066:       code = GET_CODE (insn);
                   7067:       if (GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
                   7068:        PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
                   7069: 
                   7070:       if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
                   7071:        {
                   7072:          /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms when
                   7073:             looking for duplicate operations.  */
                   7074: 
                   7075:          if (REG_NOTES (insn))
                   7076:            REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn), 0);
                   7077: 
                   7078:          /* Track when we are inside in LIBCALL block.  Inside such a block,
                   7079:             we do not want to record destinations.  The last insn of a
                   7080:             LIBCALL block is not considered to be part of the block, since
                   7081:             its desitination is the result of the block and hence should be
                   7082:             recorded.  */
                   7083: 
                   7084:          if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, 0))
                   7085:            in_libcall_block = 1;
                   7086:          else if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
                   7087:            in_libcall_block = 0;
                   7088: 
                   7089:          cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block);
                   7090:        }
                   7091: 
                   7092:       /* If INSN is now an unconditional jump, skip to the end of our
                   7093:         basic block by pretending that we just did the last insn in the
                   7094:         basic block.  If we are jumping to the end of our block, show
                   7095:         that we can have one usage of TO.  */
                   7096: 
                   7097:       if (simplejump_p (insn))
                   7098:        {
                   7099:          if (to == 0)
                   7100:            return 0;
                   7101: 
                   7102:          if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) == to)
                   7103:            to_usage = 1;
                   7104: 
                   7105:          insn = PREV_INSN (to);
                   7106:        }
                   7107: 
                   7108:       /* See if it is ok to keep on going past the label
                   7109:         which used to end our basic block.  Remember that we incremented
                   7110:         the count of that label, so we decremement it here.  If we made
                   7111:         a jump unconditional, TO_USAGE will be one; in that case, we don't
                   7112:         want to count the use in that jump.  */
                   7113: 
                   7114:       if (to != 0 && NEXT_INSN (insn) == to
                   7115:          && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL && --LABEL_NUSES (to) == to_usage)
                   7116:        {
                   7117:          struct cse_basic_block_data val;
                   7118: 
                   7119:          insn = NEXT_INSN (to);
                   7120: 
                   7121:          if (LABEL_NUSES (to) == 0)
                   7122:            delete_insn (to);
                   7123: 
                   7124:          /* Find the end of the following block.  Note that we won't be
                   7125:             following branches in this case.  If TO was the last insn
                   7126:             in the function, we are done.  Similarly, if we deleted the
                   7127:             insn after TO, it must have been because it was preceeded by
                   7128:             a BARRIER.  In that case, we are done with this block because it
                   7129:             has no continuation.  */
                   7130: 
                   7131:          if (insn == 0 || INSN_DELETED_P (insn))
                   7132:            return 0;
                   7133: 
                   7134:          to_usage = 0;
                   7135:          val.path_size = 0;
                   7136:          cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, 0, 0);
                   7137: 
                   7138:          /* If the tables we allocated have enough space left
                   7139:             to handle all the SETs in the next basic block,
                   7140:             continue through it.  Otherwise, return,
                   7141:             and that block will be scanned individually.  */
                   7142:          if (val.nsets * 2 + next_qty > max_qty)
                   7143:            break;
                   7144: 
                   7145:          cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
                   7146:          cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
                   7147:          to = val.last;
                   7148: 
                   7149:          /* Prevent TO from being deleted if it is a label.  */
                   7150:          if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
                   7151:            ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
                   7152: 
                   7153:          /* Back up so we process the first insn in the extension.  */
                   7154:          insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
                   7155:        }
                   7156:     }
                   7157: 
                   7158:   if (next_qty > max_qty)
                   7159:     abort ();
                   7160: 
                   7161:   /* If we are running before loop.c, we stopped on a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END, and
                   7162:      the previous insn is the only insn that branches to the head of a loop,
                   7163:      we can cse into the loop.  Don't do this if we changed the jump
                   7164:      structure of a loop unless we aren't going to be following jumps.  */
                   7165: 
                   7166:   if ((cse_jumps_altered == 0 || flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0)
                   7167:       && around_loop && to != 0
                   7168:       && GET_CODE (to) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (to) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
                   7169:       && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (to)) == JUMP_INSN
                   7170:       && JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)) != 0
                   7171:       && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to))) == 1)
                   7172:     cse_around_loop (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)));
                   7173: 
                   7174:   return to ? NEXT_INSN (to) : 0;
                   7175: }
                   7176: 
                   7177: /* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
                   7178:    COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
                   7179:    we count each register usage.  */
                   7180: 
                   7181: static void
                   7182: count_reg_usage (x, counts, incr)
                   7183:      rtx x;
                   7184:      int *counts;
                   7185:      int incr;
                   7186: {
                   7187:   enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
                   7188:   char *fmt;
                   7189:   int i, j;
                   7190: 
                   7191:   switch (code)
                   7192:     {
                   7193:     case REG:
                   7194:       counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
                   7195:       return;
                   7196: 
                   7197:     case PC:
                   7198:     case CC0:
                   7199:     case CONST:
                   7200:     case CONST_INT:
                   7201:     case CONST_DOUBLE:
                   7202:     case SYMBOL_REF:
                   7203:     case LABEL_REF:
                   7204:     case CLOBBER:
                   7205:       return;
                   7206: 
                   7207:     case SET:
                   7208:       /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST.  */
                   7209:       if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG)
                   7210:        count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, incr);
                   7211:       count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts, incr);
                   7212:       return;
                   7213: 
                   7214:     case INSN:
                   7215:     case JUMP_INSN:
                   7216:     case CALL_INSN:
                   7217:       count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, incr);
                   7218: 
                   7219:       /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
                   7220:         use them.  */
                   7221: 
                   7222:       if (REG_NOTES (x))
                   7223:        count_reg_usage (REG_NOTES (x), counts, incr);
                   7224:       return;
                   7225: 
                   7226:     case EXPR_LIST:
                   7227:     case INSN_LIST:
                   7228:       if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
                   7229:        count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, incr);
                   7230:       if (XEXP (x, 1))
                   7231:        count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, incr);
                   7232:       return;
                   7233:     }
                   7234: 
                   7235:   fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
                   7236:   for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   7237:     {
                   7238:       if (fmt[i] == 'e')
                   7239:        count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, incr);
                   7240:       else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
                   7241:        for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
                   7242:          count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, incr);
                   7243:     }
                   7244: }
                   7245: 
                   7246: /* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
                   7247:    that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
                   7248: 
                   7249:    This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse.  It improves the
                   7250:    heuristics in loop since it won't try to move dead invariants out of loops
                   7251:    or make givs for dead quantities.  The remaining passes of the compilation
                   7252:    are also sped up.  */
                   7253: 
                   7254: void
                   7255: delete_dead_from_cse (insns, nreg)
                   7256:      rtx insns;
                   7257:      int nreg;
                   7258: {
                   7259:   int *counts = (int *) alloca (nreg * sizeof (int));
                   7260:   rtx insn;
                   7261:   int i;
                   7262: 
                   7263:   /* First count the number of times each register is used.  */
                   7264:   bzero (counts, sizeof (int) * nreg);
                   7265:   for (insn = next_real_insn (insns); insn; insn = next_real_insn (insn))
                   7266:     count_reg_usage (insn, counts, 1);
                   7267: 
                   7268:   /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
                   7269:      registers or copy a register to itself.  As we delete an insn, remove
                   7270:      usage counts for registers it uses.  */
                   7271:   for (insn = prev_real_insn (get_last_insn ());
                   7272:        insn; insn = prev_real_insn (insn))
                   7273:     {
                   7274:       int live_insn = 0;
                   7275: 
                   7276:       if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
                   7277:        {
                   7278:          if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
                   7279:              && SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
                   7280:            ;
                   7281: 
                   7282:          else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) != REG
                   7283:                   || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   7284:                   || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)))] != 0
                   7285:                   || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
                   7286:            live_insn = 1;
                   7287:        }
                   7288:       else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
                   7289:        for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
                   7290:          {
                   7291:            rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
                   7292: 
                   7293:            if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
                   7294:              {
                   7295:                if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == REG
                   7296:                    && SET_DEST (elt) == SET_SRC (elt))
                   7297:                  ;
                   7298: 
                   7299:                else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) != REG
                   7300:                         || REGNO (SET_DEST (elt)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   7301:                         || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (elt))] != 0
                   7302:                         || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt)))
                   7303:                  live_insn = 1;
                   7304:              }
                   7305:            else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
                   7306:              live_insn = 1;
                   7307:          }
                   7308:       else
                   7309:        live_insn = 1;
                   7310: 
                   7311:       /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
                   7312:         being used.  If this is the last insn of a libcall sequence, don't
                   7313:         delete it even if it is dead because we don't know how to do so
                   7314:         here.  */
                   7315: 
                   7316:       if (! live_insn && ! find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
                   7317:        {
                   7318:          count_reg_usage (insn, counts, -1);
                   7319:          PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
                   7320:          NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
                   7321:          NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
                   7322:        }
                   7323:     }
                   7324: }

unix.superglobalmegacorp.com

This archive runs on limited infrastructure. Preserving old code on modern bandwidth. Automated agents are requested to crawl responsibly.